FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U Portable Tablet Computer with Multi-band CDMA/LTE, WLAN and Bluetooth

 

i925.book Page 1 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Health and Safety and Warranty Guide Please read this manual before operating your phone and keep it for future reference. GH68-38120A Printed in Korea This document is watermarked because certain important information in the document has not yet been verified. This document has been sent to you as a draft and for informational purposes only. The document should only be used for internal purposes and may not be distributed outside of Samsung, except to Samsung's carrier customer for testing purposes. Distributing the document outside of Samsung, except to Samsung's carrier customer for testing purposes could result in legal exposure to the company if the preliminary, unverified information in the draft turns out to be inaccurate. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 2 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the Phone System), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers. Open Source Software Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License

(GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To SCH-I925_HS_English_LL3_CB_012113_F1 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 3 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses, please visit:

http://opensource.samsung.com. Disclaimer of Warranties;

Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 4 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS. SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE. USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC Headquarters:

1301 E. Lookout Drive Richardson, TX 75082 Customer Care Center:

1000 Klein Rd. Plano, TX 75074 Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357) DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 5 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Internet Address:

http://www.samsung.com DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 6 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 1 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Table of Contents Section 1: Health and Safety Information ........ 3 Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals ..................3 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information ............................................................12 FCC Part 15 Information to User .................................15 Smart Practices While Driving ....................................16 Battery Use and Safety ...............................................18 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling ...................21 UL Certified Travel Charger ........................................21 Display / Touch-Screen ..............................................23 GPS ...........................................................................23 Care and Maintenance ...............................................25 Responsible Listening ................................................26 Operating Environment ...............................................30 Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device ...34 FCC Notice and Cautions ............................................34 Other Important Safety Information ............................35 Section 2: Warranty Information ...................... 38 Standard Limited Warranty .........................................38 End User License Agreement for Software ..................47 Social Hub .................................................................61 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ...........................................71 Social Hub Privacy Policy ...........................................75 INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT ..............................77 USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT ..........................78 1 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 2 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THIRD PARTIES .... 79 CHILDREN .................................................................. 81 SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT .......... 81 CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS ................. 82 CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES ................................. 83 ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT ........ 84 CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY ................................... 85 Social Hub End User License Agreement .................... 85 Section 3: Samsung Product Registration ....... 94 Index 95 2 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 3 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Section 1: Health and Safety Information This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your Galaxy Tab. The terms GALAXY or mobile device are used in this section to refer to your Galaxy Tab. Read this information before using your mobile device. Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals Although GALAXY is not a cell phone, it can operate on the same network as cell phones and can use the same Radio Frequency (RF) signals to communicate with the network as a cell phone. Therefore, although the following information refers specifically to RF exposure from wireless phones, it may apply similarly to GALAXY when it is being used on a cell phone network. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the following information:

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems. Health and Safety Information 3 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 4 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems. The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy. Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material. 4 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 5 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy, including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies. While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat. Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems?

The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed. The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge. Some of these studies are described below. Health and Safety Information 5 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 6 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Interphone Study Interphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000 people with brain tumors

(glioma and meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls. Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than hour per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data. Additional information about Interphone can be found at http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf. Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field. 6 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 7 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users

(COSMOS) The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html. Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS) MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/

view.php?ID=39. Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in Health and Safety Information 7 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 8 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM risk for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at http://seer.cancer.gov/. Cell Phone Industry Actions Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:

Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;

Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user; and

Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and human health concerns. The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public. 8 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 9 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.

Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone. Hands-Free Kits Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones. Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body. Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be Health and Safety Information 9 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 10 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM used for convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving. Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike hands-free kits, these so-called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. Children and Cell Phones The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well.

Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone. 10 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 11 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations (updated 10/1/2010):

FCC RF Safety Program:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.

(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.

World Health Organization (WHO):

http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/. Health and Safety Information 11 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 12 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:

http://www.icnirp.de.

Health Protection Agency:

http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.

US Food and Drug Administration:

http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/

RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/

HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information Your wireless mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government. These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations: the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy. 12 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 13 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless devices to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the mobile device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the mobile device while operating can be well below the maximum reported value. This is because the mobile device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output of the mobile device. Before a new model mobile device is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Health and Safety Information 13 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 14 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Tests for each model mobile device are performed in positions and locations (e.g. near the body) as required by the FCC. For typical operations, this mobile device has been tested and meets FCC SAR guidelines. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. This [mobile phone/tablet/

device] has a FCC ID number: A3LSCHI925U [Model Number: SCH-I925U] and the specific SAR levels for this

[mobile phone/tablet/device] can be found at the following FCC website:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/. The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsungs website:

http://www.samsung.com/sar. SAR information on this and other model mobile devices can be accessed online on the FCC's website through http:/

/transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that pertains to a particular model mobile device, this site uses the mobile device FCC ID number, which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the mobile device. 14 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 15 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular mobile device, follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular mobile device. Additional SAR information can also be obtained at http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-

cellular-telephones. FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful Health and Safety Information 15 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 16 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Smart Practices While Driving On the Road - Off the Tablet The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle. Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to passengers, or using a mobile device -

unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes 16 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 17 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions. Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in certain areas. Before using your device to chat with friends, consider your circumstances. Let the chat wait when driving conditions require. Remember, driving comes first, nothing else!

If you consider a chat necessary and appropriate, follow these tips:

Use a hands-free device;

Secure your mobile device within easy reach;

Chat when you are not moving;

Plan chats when your car will be stationary;

Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;

Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the chat if necessary;

Do not take notes or look up information while driving;

Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile:

Health and Safety Information 17 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 18 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines, penalties, or other damages. Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the drivers clear view of the street and traffic. Never use wireless data services such as Web browsing or e-mail while operating a vehicle. Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games while operating a vehicle. For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org. Battery Use and Safety The battery in GALAXY is not intended to be replaced by the consumer. If you believe the battery is damaged or needs to be replaced, take the GALAXY to a service center for inspection and replacement. 18 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 19 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

Do not let the GALAXY or battery come in contact with liquids. Liquids can get into the GALAXYs circuits, leading to corrosion. Even when the GALAXY appears to be dry and appears to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the GALAXY and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working properly.

Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive heating can damage the GALAXY or the battery and could cause the GALAXY or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your GALAXY in your car in high temperatures.

Do not dispose of the GALAXY or the battery in a fire. The GALAXY or the battery may explode when overheated.

Avoid dropping the GALAXY. Dropping the GALAXY, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the GALAXY. If you suspect damage to the GALAXY or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.

Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way. Health and Safety Information 19 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 20 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are specifically designed for your GALAXY. WARNING!

Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the GALAXY caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/

or chargers.

Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.

Misuse or use of incompatible batteries and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious hazard. 20 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 21 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories. Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly. For more information about recycling your GALAXY, go to:

http://mobile.samsungusa.com/recycling/index.jsp or call 1-800-822-8837 for more information. To find the nearest recycling location, go to:

www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect or call 1-877-278-0799. Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode. UL Certified Travel Charger The Travel Charger for this mobile device has met applicable UL safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions per UL guidelines:

Health and Safety Information 21 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 22 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET. THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION. 22 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 23 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Display / Touch-Screen Please note the following information when using your mobile device:

WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more information, please refer to the Standard Limited Warranty. GPS GALAXY can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to Health and Safety Information 23 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 24 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance of location-based technology on your mobile device. Your Location Location-based information includes information that can be used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit location-based information. The location-based information may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties providing services. Navigation Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over time. In some areas, complete information may not be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them. All users should pay attention to road conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs. 24 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 25 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Emergency Communication GALAXY should not be relied upon for essential communications (medical emergencies, calls to 911, or communications to emergency services). GALAXY is not designed or intended to be used for such communications. Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) services which may be used on GALAXY to make phone calls do not support 911 calls and are only intended for talking with friends. Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years:

Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:

Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device. Health and Safety Information 25 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 26 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0C / 32F or above 45C /

113F. Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing so may cause a fire or explosion. Dust and Dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand. Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution. Shock or vibration Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Paint Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the devices moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation. Responsible Listening Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss. 26 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 27 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and equipment. You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device:

Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source. Health and Safety Information 27 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 28 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately.

Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.

When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to.

Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds.

Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is required before you hearing could be affected.

Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal. 28 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 29 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor. You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources:

American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300 Reston, VA 20190 Voice: (800) 222-2336 Email: info@audiology.org Internet:

http://www.audiology.org/Pages/default.aspx National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive, MSC 2320 Bethesda, MD 20892-2320 Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov Internet:

http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/

Health and Safety Information 29 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 30 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington, DC 20201 Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674) 1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636) Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328 Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov Internet:

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/

default.html 1-888-232-6348 TTY Operating Environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. 30 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 31 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device. Persons who have such devices:

Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;

Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;

Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference;

Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place;

Health and Safety Information 31 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 32 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device, consult your health care provider. For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-

faqs.html#. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so. 32 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 33 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately, if applicable (if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center. Health and Safety Information 33 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 34 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the mobile device, or use services that increase your mobile device bill. Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection Association. Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. 34 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 35 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it. Other Important Safety Information

Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device. Faulty service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.

Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment used in your vehicle are securely mounted.

Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly.

When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset.

Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or accessories. Health and Safety Information 35 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 36 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.

Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.

Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of network services to the offender, or legal action, or both.

While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes.

Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device immediately. 36 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 37 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.

If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]

Health and Safety Information 37 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 38 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Section 2: Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long?

SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC

(SAMSUNG) warrants that SAMSUNG's devices and accessories ("Products") are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date:

Tablet Batteries (Including Internal Batteries) Case 1 Year 1 Year 90 Days Other Tablet Accessories 1 Year What is not covered?

This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, 38 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 39 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress;

(b) scratches, dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG; (c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen; (d) equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear; (f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception or transmission, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or

(j) Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger not Warranty Information 39 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 40 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG Tablet for which it is specified. What are SAMSUNG's obligations?

During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, without charge to Purchaser, or at SAMSUNG's sole option, refund the purchase price. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing any Product, or may replace Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases will be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. This Limited Warranty is extended to the Purchaser and is not transferable or assignable to any other person or entity. 40 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 41 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM What must you do to obtain warranty service?

To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must return the Product to an authorized Tablet service facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product and the seller's name and address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-800-SAMSUNG. If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product. Purchaser should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service. What are the limits on SAMSUNG's liability?

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG'S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED Warranty Information 41 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 42 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR SAVINGS;

INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. 42 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 43 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT. Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state. What is the procedure for resolving disputes?

ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any Warranty Information 43 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 44 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM other person's or entity's Product or claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty. For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are

$5,000.00 or less (Small Claim), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is 44 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 45 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (Large Claim) shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrators award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNGs employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Products sale, condition or performance. You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchasers purchase of the Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: Arbitration Opt Out. You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model number;

and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found

(i) on the Product box; (ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found under Settings; (iii) on a label on the Warranty Information 45 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 46 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM back of the Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchasers purchase of the Product and providing the same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty. Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty. Precautions for Transfer and Disposal If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software. To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsungs Customer Care Center for an Extended File 46 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 47 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details. Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to Samsungs Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges may apply. Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC 1301 E. Lookout Drive Richardson, Texas 75082 Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357) 2012 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights reserved. No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without notice. [111611]

End User License Agreement for Software IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you

(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung Electronics Co.") for Warranty Information 47 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 48 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM software, owned by Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation

("Software"). Samsung Electronics Co. is a separate company from the company that provides the limited warranty for this mobile device, Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, RETURN THE DEVICE TO THE RETAILER FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung Electronics Co. grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup 48 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 49 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM purposes only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original. 2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung Electronics Co. reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties. Samsung Electronics Co. or its suppliers own the title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is licensed, not sold. 3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation), or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software. 4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you, if any. Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide Warranty Information 49 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 50 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you. 5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung Electronics Co. may provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung Electronics Co. as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility. 6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms. 7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to comply with all applicable 50 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 51 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM international and national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. 8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung Electronics Co. if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the Software. 9. Disclaimer of Warranty. ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR Warranty Information 51 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 52 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. 10. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party applications may be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device. Samsung Electronics Co. makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung Electronics Co. has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and agree that Samsung Electronics Co. is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or other materials on or available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on this mobile device to any names, 52 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 53 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM marks, products, or services of any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its products and services. You agree that Samsung Electronics Co. shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party content, products, or services available on or through any such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of any third-party application is governed by such third party application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will be subject to such third party application provider's privacy policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. 11. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party Applications. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE, TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF Warranty Information 53 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 54 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., IS DOWNLOADED, OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO THE MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK 54 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 55 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. 12. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, Warranty Information 55 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 56 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 56 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 57 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM 10, 11 AND 12) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. 13. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as

"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"

and "commercial software documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19. 14. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. 15. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.

(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties. Warranty Information 57 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 58 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with any other person's or entity's claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung Electronics 58 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 59 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Co. its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and Samsung Electronics Co. shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00

("Large Claim") shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung Electronics Co.'s employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung Electronics Co. no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of this device. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the device was purchased; (c) the device model Warranty Information 59 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 60 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM name or model number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which can be found under

"Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and providing the same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of this license. 16. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co. relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect. [101212]

60 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 61 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Social Hub Legal Terms and Privacy Samsung's Social Hub and (if applicable) the website where you accessed this Disclaimer (collectively, the

"Service"), is being made available to you by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., and its affiliates and suppliers

(collectively "Samsung") subject to the following enclosed documents:

Social Hub Terms and Conditions which governs your use of the Service generally;

Social Hub End User License Agreement which specifically governs your use of the software which forms part of, or enables you to access, the Service; and

Social Hub Privacy Policy which governs our collection and use of personal information in connection with your access to and use of the Service. By using the Service, you agree to be bound by the above documents. Please read through those documents to make sure you understand the basis on which Samsung is providing the Service to you. You will be able to access additional features available at socialhub.samsungmobile.com. Warranty Information 61 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 62 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Social Hub Terms and Conditions Acceptance of the Terms These Social Hub Terms and Conditions together with the Social Hub Privacy Policy and Social Hub End User Licence Agreement (collectively "Terms") govern your use of Social Hub, which comprises all content and services accessible through Social Hub (including third party content and services), and (if applicable) the website where you accessed these Terms (collectively the "Service"). The Terms constitute an agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., and its affiliates (collectively

"Samsung") with respect to the Service. By using the Service, you agree to be legally bound to the Terms. You are not allowed to use the Service if you do not agree to the Terms. To the extent permitted by applicable law, Samsung reserves the right to modify, update, supplement, revise or otherwise change the Terms, and to impose new or additional rules, policies, terms or conditions in relation to the Service, from time to time with or without notice to you ("Amendments"). Samsung may provide you with notice of the Amendments by sending an email message to the email address listed in your account information (if any), or by posting the notice on the Social Hub website. 62 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 63 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Such Amendments will be effective immediately and incorporated into the Terms upon sending or posting of such notice. You are responsible for regularly reviewing the Terms. Your continued use of the Service will be deemed to constitute your acceptance of any and all such Amendments. Eligibility To use the Service, you must be at least sixteen (16) years of age. If you are at least sixteen (16 ) years of age but are a minor for legal purposes where you live, you must review the Terms and have your parent or legal guardian accept the Terms on your behalf in order for you to use the Service. The person accepting the Terms on your behalf must be legally competent. Your Information When required to provide information in connection with your use of the Service, you agree to provide truthful and complete information. Providing misleading information about your identity is forbidden. When you first use the Service, you may be required to create a username and a password. You (and your parent or legal guardian, if you are a minor) are personally responsible for any use of the Service with your username and password. Warranty Information 63 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 64 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM You agree to take due care in protecting your username and password against misuse by others and promptly notify Samsung about any misuse. Termination of Service Samsung may terminate or restrict your access to certain parts of the Service if there is an indication that you have breached the Terms or at any time in its sole discretion. Your Material Except as set forth in the Social Hub Privacy Policy, Samsung shall not be responsible for any removal of the information or content you have submitted in the course of using the Service ("Material") when your access to the Service is terminated. Your submission of Material in the course of using the Service does not transfer ownership rights in the Material to Samsung. After the Material is removed from the Service by either you or Samsung, some traces of the Material may remain and copies of the Material may still reside within the servers used in providing the Service. However, Samsung does not claim ownership in your Material. You represent and warrant that you have obtained any consents, permission or licenses that may be required for you to have the legal right to submit any Material. Samsung reserves the right to terminate your access to the 64 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 65 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Service if Samsung determines, at its sole discretion, that you have repeatedly submitted infringing Materials to the Service. Using the Service You agree to:

Use the Service only for your private, non-commercial purposes;

Comply with applicable laws, the Terms and good manners;

Not submit unlawful, offensive, abusive, pornographic, harassing, libelous or other inappropriate Material;

Respect the privacy of others;

Obtain any consents, permission or licenses that may be required for you to have the legal right to submit any Material;

and

Not distribute or post spam, unreasonably large files, chain letters, pyramid schemes, viruses or any other technologies that may harm the Service, or the interest or property of the Service users. Unauthorized use of the Service (including any use in contravention of the Terms) is prohibited and may result in criminal prosecution and/or civil liability. Warranty Information 65 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 66 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Restrictions You and any third party directed by You must not display, copy, store, modify, sell, publish or redistribute the Service

(whether all or any portion of it), and such displaying, copying, storing, modification, sale, publishing and redistribution shall be prohibited unless you have obtained all necessary rights and permissions from Samsung and the owners and right holders of such the Service or relevant part. You must not use the Service for any purposes other than those permitted under the Terms. Without limiting this restriction, you must not use the service for any illegal purposes, to make unsolicited offers or advertisements, to impersonate or falsely claim affiliation with any person or entity, to misrepresent, harass, defraud or defame others, to post obscene or unreasonably offensive material, to negatively present the Service, nor for any commercial purposes. Except as expressly permitted by the Terms, and except to the extent that applicable laws prevent Samsung from restraining you from doing so, you are not allowed to disassemble, reverse engineer, tamper with the Service, transmit malicious code or collect information of other users through the Service. 66 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 67 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM You may not take any action to interrupt the functionality of or tamper with the Service or any content or service contained in or provided through the Service, or any servers used in providing the Service, or to unreasonably affect others' enjoyment of the Service in any way. Actions Required by Law Samsung may need to comply with lawful interception and/

or data retention requirements imposed by your country of residence or any other country in which you use the Service. Samsung may restrict access to any part of the Service or terminate your access to the Service, at any time in its sole discretion if required by law or by the relevant authorities or regulatory agencies to do so. Third Party Sites and Content The Service may allow access to sites on the Internet that are owned or operated by third parties. Access to such sites does not imply that Samsung endorses the site or the conduct, products or services on the site. Upon accessing any such site, you must review and agree to the rules of use of the relevant site before using the site. You acknowledge and agree that Samsung has no control over the content, products or services of third-party sites and does not assume any responsibility for or in respect of such content, products or services. Third party content and services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and Warranty Information 67 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 68 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of any third party content or service. In addition, Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to third party sites. Any question or request for service relating to third party sites should be made directly to the relevant site operator. Subscription Information Use of the Service may involve transmission of data through your service provider's network. Your network service provider may charge you for such data transmission. Samsung assumes no responsibility for the payment of any such charges. Availability The Service may be network dependent - contact your network service provider for more information. Samsung reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to change, improve and correct the Service. The Service may not be available during maintenance breaks and other times. Samsung may also decide to discontinue the Service or any part thereof in its sole discretion. In such case you will be provided with prior notification. 68 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 69 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Samsung does not represent or warrant that the Service, or any part thereof, is appropriate or available for use in any particular jurisdiction. If you choose to access the Service, you do so on you own initiative and at you own risk, and you are responsible for complying with all US federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations. Dealings with Others You may interact with other users on or through the Service. You agree that any such interactions do not involve Samsung and are solely between you and the other user(s). Intellectual Property The Service and related software are protected under international copyright laws and you are hereby notified that copyrights are claimed by Samsung. Subject to the Terms, Samsung retains all right, title and interest in the Service and in all Samsung's products, software and other properties provided to you or used by you through the Service. Personal Data The Social Hub Privacy Policy and the following additional provisions govern the use of your personal information. When you access the Service, Samsung may ask for or otherwise collect certain personal information such as your email address along with your user name and password Warranty Information 69 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 70 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM and, in certain cases, your mobile phone number so that we can communicate with you, for example to send notifications of incoming messages. When you use the Service, certain technical information such as the type and serial number of your mobile device, Internet protocol address, your mobile network and country codes, timezone, technical details of your client as well as your transactions with Samsung, for example your acceptance of the Terms, will be automatically collected by Samsung. The purposes for which Samsung may use such data are explained in the Social Hub Privacy Policy. Samsung may also participate with your selected service providers in maintaining your contact lists. The third party services and content you access through the Service and the telecommunications carriers and the network through which you access the Service are provided and hosted by your selected third party content and service providers who typically has a privacy policy of its own. We recommend you familiarize yourself with your service provider's privacy policy. Samsung is not responsible for the privacy or any other practices of such service providers. Although your messages will be transmitted through Samsung's servers, Samsung will not process the content or headers of your messages for any purpose other than as necessary to deliver and manage your messages, unless otherwise required by law. 70 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 71 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM In connection with certain services accessible via the Service, Samsung may cooperate with your operator and other third parties. Samsung may receive from such third parties certain device specific non-personal information, such as device serial number of the devices sold by the operator with preinstalled software for the Service. Such information may be used for aanalyzing the activation of the Service. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR OR VIRUS-FREE. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, IS MADE IN RELATION TO THE AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OF THE SERVICE, INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION OR CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SERVICE. YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE AND ACKNOWLEDGE Warranty Information 71 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 72 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM THAT THE USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO CONTENT FROM VARIOUS SOURCES. SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE THAT MAY BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICE, NOR SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR MALICIOUS CODE CONTAINED ON OR DISTRIBUTED THROUGH BY THIRD PARTIES. YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES, LOSSES, COSTS, OR HARM ARISING FROM YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SERVICE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, EXCEPT FOR LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR INTENTIONAL MISCONDUCT, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITIES WITH RESPECT TO YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE

(INCLUDING DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES). IF THERE IS A CLAIM THAT WE HAVE BREACHED ANY OF THE PROVISIONS IN THE TERMS, THIS DOES NOT AFFECT OR INVALIDATE THE OTHER PROVISIONS. CERTAIN STATUTORY PROVISIONS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW MAY IMPLY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR IMPOSE OBLIGATIONS UPON SAMSUNG WHICH CANNOT BE EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED OR CANNOT BE EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED EXCEPT TO A 72 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 73 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM LIMITED EXTENT. THE TERMS MUST BE READ SUBJECT TO THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS. IF THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS APPLY, TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH SAMSUNG IS ABLE TO DO SO, SAMSUNG LIMITS ITS LIABILITY UNDER THOSE PROVISIONS TO, AT ITS OPTION, IN THE CASE OF SERVICES (A) THE SUPPLYING OF THE SERVICES AGAIN; OR

(B) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE SERVICES SUPPLIED AGAIN AND, IN THE CASE OF GOODS, (A) THE REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS OR THE SUPPLY OF EQUIVALENT GOODS; (B) THE REPAIR OF THE GOODS; (C) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF REPLACING THE GOODS OR OF ACQUIRING EQUIVALENT GOODS; OR (D) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE GOODS REPAIRED. Indemnification You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Samsung from and against any and all third party claims and all liabilities, assessments, losses, costs or damages resulting from or arising out of i) your breach of the Terms, ii) your infringement or violation of any intellectual property, other rights or privacy of a third party, iii) misuse of the Service by a third party where such misuse was made possible due to your failure to take reasonable measures to protect your username and password against misuse. Warranty Information 73 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 74 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Choice of Law Except where prohibited by applicable law or provided otherwise herein, the Terms shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to its conflict of law provisions. You and Samsung agree to submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the competent courts in the State of New York to resolve any legal matters arising from the Terms. Notwithstanding this, you agree that Samsung shall still be allowed to apply for injunctive remedies (or equivalent type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction. Miscellaneous The Terms (including all documents comprising the Terms) constitute the entire agreement between you and Samsung, and supersedes any prior agreement between you and Samsung, with respect to your use of the Service. Your use of any third-party content or service accessed via the Service will be governed by the terms and conditions furnished with, and applicable to that content or service. If any provision of the Terms is held invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that portion of the Terms shall be construed in a manner consistent with applicable law to reflect, as nearly as possible, the original intentions of the parties, and the remaining portion of the Terms shall remain in full 74 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 75 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM force and effect. Samsung's failure to enforce any right or provision of the Terms will not constitute a waiver of such provision, or any other provision of the Terms. Samsung will not be liable or responsible for any failure to fulfill any of its obligations under the Terms which failure is due to any cause or condition beyond the reasonable control of Samsung. If there is any conflict between these Social Hub Terms and Conditions and the Social Hub Privacy Policy, the provisions of these Social Hub Terms and Conditions shall prevail. The provisions of the Terms that are intended to or by their nature should survive termination of your use of the Service shall remain valid after any such termination. Social Hub Privacy Policy Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") is committed to protecting the online privacy of visitors, users and customers to our Social Hub service. This privacy policy

("Privacy Policy") forms part of the Terms which govern your use of Social Hub(excluding any third party content and services), and (if applicable) the website where you accessed this Privacy Policy, (collectively, the "Service"). The purpose of the Privacy Policy is to inform you about the types of information we gather about you when you access or use the Service, how we may use that information, and if and how we disclose it to third parties. Warranty Information 75 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 76 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM All users of the Service are required to provide true, current, complete and accurate personal information when prompted and we will reject and delete any entry that we believe in good faith to be incorrect, false, falsified, or fraudulent, or inconsistent with or in violation of the Privacy Policy. We will provide you with an opportunity to give your consent in relation to your use of the Service. Separate from such consent, your access or use of the Service will be construed as your acceptance of the Privacy Policy and of our collection, use, disclosure, management and storage of your personal information as described below. We may, from time to time, transfer or merge any personal information collected off-line to our online databases or store off-line information in an electronic format. We may also combine personal information we collect online with information available from other sources, including information received from our affiliates, marketing companies, or advertisers. This Privacy Policy covers all such personal information and will remain in full force and effect as long as you are a user of the Service, even if your use of or participation in any particular service, feature, function or promotional activity terminates, expires, ceases, is suspended or deactivated for any reason. 76 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 77 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT Personal Information We may request that you supply us with "personal"

information, such as your name, e-mail address, mailing address, home or work telephone number in the course of you accessing or using the Service, such as via registration forms, surveys, and polls. In each such case, you will know what categories of information we collect because you will actively provide the information to us. You may not be able to fully utilize all of the features or components of the Service if you choose not to provide certain information. If you do choose to give us personal information through the Service, we will collect and retain that information. Non-Personal Information When you use the Service, we may also collect

"non-personal" information. We consider "non-personal information" to be information that, by itself, cannot be used to identify or contact you personally, such as demographic information (your age, gender, income, education, profession, zip code, etc.). Non-personal information may also include technical information, such as your IP address and other anonymous data involving your use of the Service. Warranty Information 77 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 78 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Non-personal information may also include information that you provide us through your use of the Service, such as the terms you enter into the search functions of Social Hub, mail inbox and instant messenger. We reserve the right to use or disclose non-personal information in any way we see fit. USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT Our Services We use your personal information to provide you with any services that you may request or require, to communicate with you and to allow you to participate in online surveys. We use aggregated non-personal information about our users to understand the demographics of users of the Service, such as the percentage of male and female users, the geographic distribution of our users, the age ranges of our users, a combination of these and/or other demographics. We may also use the personal or non-personal information we collect to analyze how Service is being used, and to improve the content of the Service, and for marketing and promotional efforts. E-mail Communications If you send us an e-mail with questions or comments, we may use your personal information to respond to your questions or comments, and we may save your questions or comments for future reference. Aside from our reply to 78 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 79 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM such an e-mail, it is not our standard practice to send you e-mail unless you request a particular service that involves e-mail communications. However, you consent to us contacting you by e-mail, and sending you information about products and services which we believe may be of interest to you. You may have the opportunity to subscribe to an electronic newsletter in which case information about the Service or our advertisers will be sent to your e-mail address. We will provide you with the option to change your preferences and opt-out of receiving those communications. You may request at any time that we not e-mail you in future by clicking the "unsubscribe" link which is included at the bottom of any e-mail that you receive from us. If you unsubscribe, we will make reasonable efforts to discontinue e-mail communications to you as soon as practicable. DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THIRD PARTIES Aggregate Information Except as specifically set forth in this Privacy Policy, we do not share your personal information with any third party without your permission. We may disclose aggregate information, such as demographic information, and our statistical analyses to third parties, including advertisers or other business partners. This aggregate information does not include your personal information. Warranty Information 79 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 80 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Service Providers We sometimes engage unaffiliated businesses to assist us in providing you certain services. For example, we may use third parties to provide advertising, marketing and promotional assistance, provide e-mail services, or facilitate our online services. In those instances, we may need to share your personal information with them. We require these companies to use your personal information only to provide the particular product or service and do not authorize them to use your personal information for any other reason. We sometimes offer promotions in conjunction with a third party sponsor. If you choose to participate in those promotions, we may share your information with the sponsor if they need it to send you a product or other special promotion they offer. Third Party Advertisers We may use third-party advertising companies to deliver specific advertisements to you. These companies may collect non-personal information about your visits to Social Hub in order to provide advertisements about products and services that may be of interest to you. These companies may also aggregate your non-personal information for use in targeted advertising, marketing research, and other similar purposes. These companies may place their own cookies on your computer. If you want 80 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 81 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM to prevent a third-party advertiser from collecting and using this information, you may visit each third party advertiser's website directly and opt-out. Other Disclosures We may disclose personal information when we are required or requested to do so by law, court order or other government or law enforcement authority or regulatory agency; to enforce or apply our rights and agreements; or when we believe in good faith that disclosing this information is necessary or advisable, including, for example, to protect the rights, property, or safety of the Service and Samsung, our users, or others. CHILDREN The Service is not designed for use by children without their parent's supervision. We ask that anyone under the age of sixteen (16) not submit any personal information through the Service. We do not knowingly collect any personal information from children under the age of eighteen, and therefore we do not knowingly distribute such information to third parties. SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT The security of your personal information is important to us. We maintain physical, electronic, and procedural safeguards to secure your personal information. However, Warranty Information 81 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 82 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM there is always some risk in transmitting information electronically. The personal information we collect is stored within databases that we control. As we deem appropriate, we use security measures consistent with industry standards, such as firewalls and encryption technology, to protect your information. However, we cannot guarantee the security of our databases, nor can we guarantee that information you supply won't be intercepted while being transmitted to us over the Internet. CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS Our third party service and content providers may offer chat, user reviews, bulletin boards, or other public functions and any posting by you is considered public information available to other users. Any posting is governed in accordance with the third party service and content providers' terms and conditions. You should take care not to use personal information in your screen name or other information that might be publicly available to other users. Archived Information We maintain archives of web logs, database, and other systems and information in relation to the Service. Please note that it is possible some of this information may remain 82 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 83 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM archived after we delete the information from its active database. We maintain archives for disaster recovery, legal and other non-marketing purposes. How can I update my profile?

You can help us maintain the accuracy of your profile by notifying us when you change zip/postal code, country of residence, age range, or e-mail address. If at any time you wish to update your information or stop receiving communication from us, sign in to the Service and then select 'update your profile' to change your preferences. CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES Registration may be required to enter promotions such as contests and sweepstakes on Social Hub. These registration or entry processes may require your submission of personal information such as your first and last name, street address, city, state and zip code, e-mail address, telephone number and date of birth. The entry page and/or rules for the promotion will provide the specific requirements for the promotion. You may also have the opportunity to opt-in to special offers from our advertisers in connection with these promotions. Warranty Information 83 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 84 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT Any questions you may have regarding this Privacy Policy, the accuracy of your personal information or the use of your personal information, or any requests that we correct, update, or remove your information in our databases, should be directed via e-mail to s.dufresne@Samsung.com, or via regular mail to:

Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC 1301 E. Lookout Drive, Richardson, TX 75082 Attn: Customer Support Department After receiving a request to change your information, we will make reasonable efforts to ensure that all of your personal information stored in databases we actively use to operate the Service will be updated, corrected, changed or deleted, as appropriate, as soon as reasonably practicable. However, we reserve the right to retain in our archival files any information we remove from or change in our active databases. We may retain such information to resolve disputes, troubleshoot problems and enforce our Terms. In addition, it is not technologically possible to remove each and every record of the information you have provided to us. A copy of your personal information may exist in a non-erasable form that will be difficult or impossible for us to locate. 84 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 85 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY This Privacy Policy is effective as of May 29, 2010 and complies with Samsung's Corporate Privacy Policy. We reserve the right to change this Privacy Policy at any time, and will post any such changes to this Privacy Policy on the Social Hub website. Please refer back to the Social Hub website on a regular basis to obtain the most up to date Privacy Policy. Social Hub End User License Agreement 1. SOCIAL HUB This end user license ("License") allows you to use Social Hub ("Software") made available on your mobile device. This License is a legally binding agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. the ("Licensor"). 2. LICENSE 2.1 Licensor grants you for the term of this License a limited, personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use the Software in object code executable only form on a single device for non-commercial uses. 2.2 All rights not expressly granted to you under this License are reserved to Licensor, and you agree not to take or permit any action with respect to the Software that is not expressly authorised under this License. For the avoidance of doubt, you have no right to use, incorporate into other products, copy, modify, translate or transfer to any third Warranty Information 85 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 86 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM party the Software or any modification, adaptation or copy of the Software or any part thereof, nor to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the binary code of the Software, either in whole or in part, except as expressly provided in this License. 2.3 The Software is licensed to you only. You may not rent, lease, sub-license, sell, assign, pledge, transfer or otherwise dispose of the Software, on a temporary or permanent basis without the prior written consent of Licensor. 3. OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 3.1 Your only right to use the Software is by virtue of this License and you acknowledge that all intellectual property rights in or relating to the Software and all parts of the Software are and shall remain the exclusive property of Licensor or its licensors. 3.2 You agree that you will not remove or alter any copyright notices or similar proprietary devices, including without limitation any electronic watermarks or other identifiers, that may be incorporated in the Software or any copy of the Software. 86 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 87 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM 4. CONFIDENTIALITY 4.1 The structure, organisation and source code of the Software are the valuable trade secrets and proprietary confidential information of Licensor and its licensors. You agree not to provide or disclose any such confidential information in the Software or derived from it to any third party. 4.2 The provisions of clause 4.1 will not apply to any information which is:

4.2.1 lawfully obtained free of any duty of confidentiality

(otherwise than directly or indirectly from Licensor); or 4.2.2 already in your possession, provided that Licensee can show such possession from written records (other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4); or 4.2.3 which you can demonstrate is in the public domain

(other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4). 4.3 To the extent that any information is necessarily disclosed pursuant to a statutory or regulatory obligation or court order, such disclosure shall not be a breach of this clause 4 provided you do what you can to prevent any such disclosure. 5. WARRANTY AND SUPPORT The Software is provided "as is" with no representation, guarantee or warranty of any kind as to its functionality or that it does not and will not infringe any third party rights Warranty Information 87 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 88 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM

(including intellectual property rights). Licensor has no obligation under this License to provide technical or other support to you. 6. LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY 6.1 Licensor does not exclude its liability (if any) to you:

6.1.1 for personal injury or death resulting from Licensor's negligence;

6.1.2 for fraud; or 6.1.3 for any matter for which it would be illegal for Licensor to exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability. 6.2 LICENSOR MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND LICENSOR HEREBY EXCLUDES (TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE IN LAW), ALL CONDITIONS, WARRANTIES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE) AND STIPULATIONS, EXPRESS (OTHER THAN THOSE SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE) OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY, CUSTOMARY OR OTHERWISE WHICH, BUT FOR SUCH EXCLUSION, WOULD OR MIGHT SUBSIST IN FAVOUR OF YOU. EXCEPT AS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. 88 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 89 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM 6.3 SUBJECT TO CLAUSE 6.1 LICENSOR WILL BE UNDER NO LIABILITY TO YOU WHATSOEVER (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), BREACH OF STATUTORY DUTY, RESTITUTION OR OTHERWISE) FOR ANY INJURY, DEATH, DAMAGE OR DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS (ALL THREE OF WHICH TERMS INCLUDE, WITHOUT LIMITATION, PURE ECONOMIC LOSS, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF SAVINGS, DEPLETION OF GOODWILL AND LIKE LOSS) HOWSOEVER CAUSED ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH:

6.3.1 THE SOFTWARE, OR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OR SUPPLY, OR FAILURE OR DELAY IN SUPPLY, OF THE SOFTWARE BY LICENSOR OR ON THE PART OF LICENSOR'S EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUB-CONTRACTORS;

6.3.2 ANY BREACH BY LICENSOR OF ANY OF THE EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TERMS OF THIS LICENSE;

6.3.3 ANY USE MADE OF THE SOFTWARE; OR 6.3.4 ANY STATEMENT MADE OR NOT MADE, OR ADVICE GIVEN OR NOT GIVEN, BY OR ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR. 6.4 Disclaimer of Certain Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY PARTY RELATED TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS, EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE Warranty Information 89 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 90 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER FRAUD, MISREPRESENTATION, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGILIGENCE, PERSONAL INJURY, PRODUCTS LIABILITY, INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT, OR ANY OTHER THEORY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS MEANS THAT YOU WILL NOT SEEK, AND HEREBY WAIVE, ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, TREBLE, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FROM SAMSUNG. THIS LIMITATION AND WAIVER ALSO APPLIES TO ANY CLAIMS YOU MAY BRING AGAINST ANY OTHER PARTY TO THE EXTENT THAT SAMSUNG WOULD BE REQUIRED TO INDEMNIFY THAT PARTY FOR SUCH CLAIM. 6.5 You acknowledge that the above provisions of this clause 6 are reasonable for the Software and you will accept such risk and/or insure accordingly. 6.6 Any rights that you have as a consumer are not affected by this clause 6. 7. TERM AND TERMINATION 7.1 This License shall commence upon the earlier of your acceptance of this License or your activation of the Software and shall continue until terminated in accordance with clause 7.2 or otherwise in accordance with this License. 90 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 91 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM 7.2 This License will terminate automatically if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License or if you cease to use the Software for any reason. 7.3 Upon termination of this License for any reason whatsoever Licensor retains the right to permanently disable your access to the Software. 7.4 The termination of this License howsoever arising is without prejudice to the rights, duties and liabilities of either party accrued prior to termination. Clauses 2.2, 2.3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.3, 8, 9 and 10 of this License will continue to be enforceable notwithstanding termination. 8. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION 8.1 The formation, existence, construction, performance, validity and all aspects whatsoever of this License or of any term of this License will be governed by the laws of the State of New York. 8.2 The courts in New York City will have non-exclusive jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in connection with this License. The parties irrevocably agree to submit to that jurisdiction. 9. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW You acknowledge and agree that notwithstanding the fact that this License is governed by the laws of the Republic of Korea, you may be subject to additional laws in other jurisdictions with respect to your use of the Software. You Warranty Information 91 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 92 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM will comply with the laws of any jurisdiction that apply to the Software, including without limitation any applicable export laws or regulations. 10.GENERAL 10.1 If any clause or part of this License is found by any court, tribunal, administrative body or authority of competent jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable then that provision will, to the extent required, be severed from this License and will be ineffective without, as far as is possible, modifying any other clause or part of this License and this will not affect any other provisions of this License which will remain in full force and effect. 10.2 No failure or delay by any party to exercise any right, power or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any partial exercise preclude any further exercise of the same, or of some other right, power or remedy. 10.3 The parties to this License do not intend that any of its terms will be enforceable by any person not a party to it. 10.4 This License contains all the terms which the parties have agreed in relation to the subject matter of this License and supersedes any prior written or oral agreements, representations or understandings between the parties in relation to such subject matter. 92 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 93 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM 10.5 Licensor reserves the right to revise the terms of this License by updating the License on its web site, or by notifying you by post or by e-mail. You are advised to check the Licensor's website periodically for notices concerning revisions. Your continued use of the Software shall be deemed to constitute acceptance of any revised terms. 10.6 You will be deemed to have accepted the terms of this License by using the Software on any device. Warranty Information 93 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 94 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Section 3: Samsung Product Registration 94 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 95 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM Index Battery Use & Safety 17 C Care and Maintenance 28 Children and Cell Phones 10 D Display / Touch-Screen 23 Do cell phones pose a health hazard? 2 Emergency Calls 26 Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals 2 F FCC Notice and Cautions 40 G GPS & AGPS 24 B E H Health and Safety Information 2 O Operating Environment 33 Other Important Safety Information 41 95 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY i925.book Page 96 Monday, January 21, 2013 9:29 AM R Reducing Exposure Hands-Free Kits and Other Accessories 8 Responsible Listening 29 Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device 40 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 20 Smart Practices While Driving 15 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information 12 Standard Limited Warranty 43 UL Certified Travel Charger 22 S U W Warranty Information 43 96 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

 

 

A N D R O I D T A B L E T User Manual Please read this manual before operating your device and keep it for future reference. This document is watermarked because certain important information in the document has not yet been verified. This document has been sent to you as a draft and for informational purposes only. The document should only be used for internal purposes and may not be distributed outside of Samsung, except to Samsung's carrier customer for testing purposes. Distributing the document outside of Samsung, except to Samsung's carrier customer for testing purposes could result in legal exposure to the company if the preliminary, unverified information in the draft turns out to be inaccurate. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Galaxy Tab, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the Galaxy Tab System), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers. Open Source Software Some software components of this product, including but not limited to 'PowerTOP' and 'e2fsprogs', incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses, please visit:

http://opensource.samsung.com. Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING SGH-I925_UM_Eng_LK1_CB_120612_D1 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS. SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE. USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. SAFE: "SAFE" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more information about Samsung's SAFE program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe. Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES. In DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider, solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab devices are sold. [101212]

Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC Headquarters:

1301 E. Lookout Drive Richardson, TX 75082 Customer Care Center:

1000 Klein Rd. Plano, TX 75074 Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357) Internet Address:

http://www.samsung.com 2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device?

For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:

www.samsung.com/us/support Nuance, VSuite, T9 Text Input, XT9 Smart Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries. The Bluetooth word mark, figure mark (stylized B Design), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and B Design) are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG. microSDTM, microSDHCTM, and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association. Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Calendar, Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google Play Books, Google Play Music, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. Peel and the Peel logo are marks owned by Peel Technologies, Inc. and may be registered.

, DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under TM license. DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-

Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (Apps > Settings DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY> About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Table of Contents Section 1: Getting Started .......................... 4 Understanding This User Manual . 4 Battery . 5 Installing the SIM Card . 8 Turning Your Device On and Off . 9 Setting Up Your Device . 9 Creating a New Google Account . 13 Retrieving Your Google Account Password . 13 Using Google Maps . 14 Task Manager . 14 Memory Card . 15 Galaxy Tab Accessories . 17 Securing Your Device . 17 Troubleshooting . 19 Section 2: Understanding Your Device .... 20 Features . 20 Front View . 21 Top View . 22 Back and Bottom Views . 22 S Pen . 23 Home Screen . 28 Navigating Your Device . 32 Notifications . 35 Status Details . 36 Quick Settings . 36 Status Bar . 39 App Shortcuts . 40 Widgets . 41 Folders . 42 Wallpapers . 43 Mini App Tray . 44 S Pen App Tray . 46 Section 3: Entering Text ............................47 Samsung Keyboard . 47 Text Input Methods . 47 Changing the Input Method . 47 Using the Samsung Keyboard . 48 Using the Handwriting Feature . 53 1 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Using Speech Recognition . 55 Section 4: Contacts and Accounts ...........56 Accounts . 56 Contacts . 57 Groups . 63 Favorites . 65 Section 5: Messaging ................................68 Types of Messages . 68 Email . 68 Gmail . 76 Google Talk . 80 Google+ . 84 Messenger . 84 Section 6: Multimedia ...............................86 Media Hub . 86 Game Hub . 88 Music Player . 89 Video Player . 95 Play Movies & TV . 97 Gallery . 98 Camera . 102 Camcorder . 106 2 Photo Editor . 109 Games . 111 Section 7: Connections ...........................112 Internet . 112 Wi-Fi . 120 Bluetooth . 122 Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot . 126 Tethering . 127 VPN . 128 Nearby devices . 128 AllShare Cast . 129 Kies Via Wi-Fi . 129 Managing Downloads . 130 Synchronizing with Windows Media Player . 132 Connecting as a Mass Storage Device . 132 Memory Card . 133 Section 8: Applications and Widgets .....134 Apps Screen . 134 Widgets . 164 Section 9: Settings ..................................168 Accessing Settings . 168 Wireless and network . 169 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Device . 179 Personal . 187 Accounts . 198 System . 199 About device . 205 Section 10: Health and Safety Information . 207 Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . 207 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . 212 FCC Part 15 Information to User . 214 Smart Practices While Driving . 214 Battery Use and Safety . 215 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . 217 UL Certified Travel Charger . 217 Display / Touch-Screen . 218 GPS . 218 Care and Maintenance . 219 Responsible Listening . 220 Operating Environment . 222 Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device 224 FCC Notice and Cautions . 224 Other Important Safety Information . 224 Section 11: Warranty Information ..........226 Standard Limited Warranty . 226 End User License Agreement for Software . 231 Index .........................................................239 3 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 1: Getting Started This section helps you to quickly start using your device. Understanding This User Manual The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your device. A robust index for features begins on page 239. Also included is important safety information, beginning on page 207, that you should know before using your device. This manual gives navigation instructions according to the default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation steps may be different. Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual assume that you are starting from a Home screen. To get to a Home screen, you may need to unlock the device. For more information, refer to Securing Your Device on page 17. Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings and may vary from your device depending on the software version on your device and any changes to the devices settings. 4 Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen. All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may vary depending on the software version of your device and any changes to the devices settings. Special Text In this manual, some text is set apart from the rest. This special text is intended to point out important information, share quick methods for activating features, define terms, and more. The definitions for these methods are as follows:

Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or sub-menu.

Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts.

Important: Points out important information about the current feature that could affect performance.

Warning: Brings important information to your attention that can help to prevent loss of data or functionality or damage to your device. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Text Conventions This manual provides condensed information about how to use your device. To make this possible, the following text conventions are used to represent often-used steps:

Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting successive options in longer, or repetitive, procedures. For example:

From a Home screen, touch Display Screen timeout. Apps Settings Battery Your device is powered by a rechargeable, standard Li-Ion battery. A Wall/USB Charger (Charging Head and USB cable) are included with the device for charging the battery. Warning! Use only approved charging devices. Approved accessories are designed to maximize battery life. Using other accessories may invalidate your warranty and may cause damage. in the Status Bar shows the battery Battery Indicator The Battery icon power level. When battery power is 15% or less, your device prompts you to charge the battery. If you continue to operate the device without charging, the device powers off. For battery use information, see Battery on page 186. Tip: Touch the Time field to display battery charge status. Charging the Battery Your device comes with a Wall/USB Charger (Outlet Connector, Charging Head, and USB cable) to charge your device from any standard AC power outlet. Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully charge the battery before using your device for the first time. After the first charge, you can use the device while charging. Getting Started 5 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 1. Assemble the Wall/USB Charger by removing the 2. Insert the USB cable into the Charging Head (1). protective plastic sheets from the Outlet Connector and the Charging Head and inserting the Outlet Connector

(1) into the receptacle on the Charging Head (2) as shown. Outlet Connector Correct Charging Head Incorrect Charging Head 6 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. Insert the USB cable into the devices Charger/

Accessory Port (2). Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not function due to an unstable power supply, unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device. 5. When charging is complete, unplug the Charging Head from the power outlet and remove the USB cable from the device. Note: You cannot charge the battery using the USB cable and your PC. Note: If the battery is completely discharged, you cannot turn on the device, even with the USB power adapter connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before you try to turn on the device. 4. Plug the Charging Head into a standard AC power outlet. Getting Started 7 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Caution! Make sure that the SIM cards gold contacts face downward and that the notched corner of the card goes in first. Correct Incorrect Installing the SIM Card When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, available optional services, and many others features. Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts can be easily damaged by scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children. Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket (1) until the card locks into place (2). The illustration shows the screen facing up. Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the device will not detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot if the SIM is not detected. 8 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Turning Your Device On and Off Turning Your Device On Press and hold the Power/Lock Key

. For more information, refer to Unlocking the Device on page 17. Note: Your devices internal antenna is located along the top back of the device. Do not block the antenna; doing so may affect signal quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than is necessary. For more information, refer to GPS Applications on page 136. Turning Your Device Off 1. Press and hold the Power/Lock Key

. 2. At the Device options prompt, touch Power off. 3. At the Power off prompt, touch OK. Setting Up Your Device When you first turn on your device, you are asked to set up a few things. To do that, the following screens appear. Some screens can be skipped (touch Skip) or re-displayed (touch Back). Some screens appear depending on the options you choose. Welcome 1. Touch the Select language field, scroll through the list, and touch the language you want your device to use, such as, English. 2. Touch Start. No SIM Card in Device The No SIM card in device screen appears if you have not installed the SIM card that was provided with your tablet. Ensure that you have an activated SIM card installed in your device prior to device set-up. For more information, refer to Installing the SIM Card on page 8. Touch Skip to operate your tablet without the SIM card. Getting Started 9 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Samsung Account Sign in to your Samsung account to use Samsung services. and 1. Touch variety of services to learn more. 2. Touch Create new account to create a Samsung account. or Touch Sign in if you already have a Samsung account. or Touch Skip to perform this task later. Wi-Fi Make sure the Wi-Fi OFF / ON icon is set to ON choose one of the following options:

Touch Add Wi-Fi network to enter a Network SSID that is not listed. Touch Scan to make sure you have an accurate list of Wi-Fi networks. Touch one of the Wi-Fi networks in the list, enter the password, and touch Connect. Touch and connect to another Wi-Fi network or touch Next to continue. Touch Skip to perform this task later. (For more information, refer to Wi-Fi on page 169.) Set Date and Time 1. Touch the time zone field (GMT) and select the correct time zone. 2. Under Date, set the date (month, day, year), if necessary. 3. Under Time, set the time (hour, minute, and AM or PM), if necessary. 4. Touch Next. 10 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Got Google?

To use all of the Android features of your tablet, you need to create a Google Account the first time you use your device. With a Google Account, Google applications, including Gmail, Maps, Navigation, Google Talk, and Google PlayTM, will always be in sync between your tablet and computer. The Got Google? screen lets you create and sign in to a new Google account or simply sign in to an existing Google account. Note: If you skipped Wi-Fi setup, the Wi-Fi setup screen displays and you must connect through a Wi-Fi network. 1. Respond to the Do you have a Google Account? as follows:

If you already have a Google account, touch Yes. The Sign in screen appears.

Touch the Email field. Enter your Google account Email ID and touch Next on the keyboard. Enter your Google account password and touch Done on the keyboard.

If you do not have a Google account, touch No. The Make it Google screen appears. To create and sign in to a new Google account, touch Get an account. To bypass this step and proceed, touch Not now.

Once you enter your Google account information, you are prompted to agree to the Google Terms of Service and Privacy Polich. Touch OK. The Signing in screen appears until your tablet is linked to your Google account. For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76. Getting Started 11 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Enable Purchases This screen displays if you signed in to your Google account. This Tablet Belongs To ... To personalize the tablet with your name:

Enter purchase information for your Google Play 1. Touch the First and Last fields and use the on-screen account and touch Save. or Touch Skip. Backup and Restore This screen also displays if you signed in to your Google account. 1. Read the backup and restore information. 2. Enable either or both options. 3. Touch Next. The Restoring screen displays while your information is being restored. Use Google Location 1. Read the information on the screen and enable either or both of the Google location services. 2. Touch Next to continue. keyboard to enter you first and last name. 2. Touch Next. Free Dropbox Account Dropbox is a cloud file storage subscription service. Using a Dropbox account, you can save files and access them with multiple devices from multiple locations. To get a free 50 GB Dropbox account for two years:

1. Touch Disclaimer to read a short disclaimer about this offer. 2. Touch OK. 3. Touch Create a new Dropbox account, enter the required fields, and touch Register for Dropbox. or Touch I already have an account to sign in to Dropbox. or Touch No thanks to skip this offer. 12 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Google Services This screen displays if you did not sign in to your Google account. The use of this device is subject to the privacy policy and other terms. 1. Touch Learn more to read the privacy policy and other terms. 2. Touch Next, if you agree that your device may receive and install updates from Google. Setup Complete Congratulations! Your device is set up and ready to use. Touch Finish. The main Home screen displays. Creating a New Google Account Your new device uses a Google account to fully use its Android features, including Gmail, Maps, Navigation, Google Talk, and Google PlayTM. If you did not create a new account during the setup procedure when you first turned your tablet on, follow these steps:

1. From a Home screen, touch The Add a Google Account screen displays. 2. Touch New to create a new Google account. Apps Gmail. For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76. Retrieving Your Google Account Password A Google account password is required for Google applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:

1. From your computer, use an Internet browser to navigate to http://google.com/accounts. 2. Once the web page loads, click on Cant access your account? and follow the on-screen instructions. Getting Started 13 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Using Google Maps In order to use some applications related to Google Maps, you must first connect Wi-Fi. (For more information, refer to Wi-Fi on page 169.) You must also enable location services to use Google Maps. Some features require Standalone or Google location services. (For more information, refer to Location services on page 187.) Task Manager Your device can run applications simultaneously and some applications run in the background. Use Task Manager to see which applications are running on your device and to end running applications to extend battery life. You can also uninstall applications from your device and see how much memory is used by applications. 14 Task Manager Pop-Up The Task manager pop-up provides information about Active applications and includes a RAM manager. It also has a link to the Task Manager application. To access the Task manager pop-up:

1. From a Home screen, touch Mini App Tray Task manager. or From any screen, touch and hold The Task manager pop-up displays. Home. 2. Touch the Active applications tab to view applications running on your device. Touch application or End all to stop all running applications. 3. Touch the RAM manager tab to display the amount of to end an Random Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch Clear memory to clear inactive and background processes. 4. Touch in the top right corner of the Task manager pop-up to close the application. 5. Touch in the top left corner to display the Task Manager application. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Task Manager Application The Task Manager application provides information about applications, including Active applications, Downloaded, RAM manager, Storage, and Help. To access the Task Manager:

1. Access Task Manager from the Task manager pop-up. For more information, refer to Task Manager Pop-Up on page 14. or Add the Application monitor widget to a Home screen and then touch Application monitor on the Application monitor widget. For more information, refer to Widgets on page 41. or Touch Navigation and then touch Task manager. 2. Touch Active applications to view applications running on your device. Touch End to end an application or End all to end all running applications. 3. Touch Downloaded to view applications installed from Google Play. Touch Uninstall to remove an application from your device. 4. Touch RAM manager to display the amount of Random Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch Clear memory to clear inactive and background processes. 5. Touch Storage to view internal (Device memory) and external (SD card) storage memory statistics. 6. Touch Help to view useful tips for extending battery life. Memory Card Your device supports removable microSD or microSDHC memory cards with maximum capacities of 32 GB

(depending on the memory card manufacturer and type). Memory cards are used to store music, photos, videos, and other files. Note: You can only store music files that you own (from a CD or purchased with the device) on a memory card. Getting Started 15 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Installing a Memory Card 1. Open the Memory Card Slot cover and turn to expose the slot. 2. With the gold contacts facing down, carefully slide the memory card into the slot (1), pushing gently until it clicks into place (2). 3. Replace the Memory Card Slot cover. Correct Incorrect Removing a Memory Card Important! To prevent damage to information stored on the memory card, unmount the card before removing it from the device. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings Storage. 2. Under SD card, touch Unmount SD card. 3. Open the Memory Card Slot cover and turn to expose the slot. 16 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. Gently press down on the memory card (1), so that it pops out from the slot, and carefully pull the card out (2). 5. Replace the Memory Card Slot cover. For more information, refer to Memory Card on page 133. Galaxy Tab Accessories To find accessories for your Galaxy Tab:

1. Go to http://www.samsung.com/us/mobile/galaxy-tab-

accessories. Galaxy Tab accessories display. 2. Use your model number to find compatible accessories. Securing Your Device By default, the device locks automatically when the screen times out or you can lock it manually. You can unlock the device using one of the default Unlock screens or, for increased security, use a personal screen unlock pattern. For more information about creating and enabling a Screen unlock pattern, see Lock screen on page 188. For other settings related to securing your device, see Location services on page 187. Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen. Locking the device manually Press the Power/Lock Key Unlocking the Device 1. Press the Power/Lock Key

. Getting Started 17 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY The Lock screen displays. 2. Swipe across the screen as shown. The last accessed screen displays. Tip: You can launch any of five applications from the Lock screen. Just touch and swipe one of the app shortcut icons to launch its associated application. You can change your Lock screen settings to enable access to the Popup Note application by using your S Pen.

(For more information, refer to Lock screen on page 188.) 18 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Note: You can customize the Lock screen and set the type of Screen Unlock you want to use (Face unlock, Pattern, PIN, or Password). For more information, see Lock screen on page 188 and see Security on page 191. Troubleshooting If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may need to reset the device to regain functionality.

If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power/Lock Key for 8 to 10 seconds. Getting Started 19 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 2: Understanding Your Device This section outlines key features of your device and describes the screen and the icons that appear when the device is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the device. Features

10.1-inch WXGA (1280x800) TFT (PLS) LCD touch screen

AndroidTM Version 4.0.4, Ice Cream Sandwich

SAFE Certified

CDMA 1X/EV-DO Rev-A /LTE Wireless Technology

Bluetooth 4.0 Wireless technology. For more information, refer to Bluetooth on page 170.

Built-in Wi-Fi technology (802.11 b/g/n)

3.2 Megapixel camera and camcorder plus 0.3 Megapixel forward-facing VGA camera

Full integration of Google applications (Gmail, YouTubeTM, Google MapsTM, and Voice Search)

Messaging Features:

GmailTM Email (corporate and personal) 20 Google TalkTM (Instant Messaging and Video Chat)

Photo Gallery that supports GIF, AGIF, JPEG, PNG, BMP, WBMP, and WEBP formats

HD Video Player (720p) Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, DivX, VP8, WMV7/8, Sorenson Spark Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI (DivX), MKV, FLV, WEBM

DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content

Supports HDMI/MHL connections to connect electronic devices to high-definition televisions (HDTVs) and displays.

Music player that supports MP3, AAC/AAC+/EAAC+, WMA, OGG (vorbis), FLAC, AC-3 (only with video), and Vorbis formats

1GB RAM memory and 16GB on-board memory, which is used for data storage and access

Support for microSDTM and microSDHCTM Memory Cards DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Preloaded applications such as AllShare PlayTM, Google PlayTM Books, Google PlayTM Store, Polaris Office, and Samsung Media Hub. (For more information, refer to Applications and Widgets on page 134.) 4. Display Screen: The orientation of the display screen rotates with the tablet as you turn it. You can turn this function on or off. (For more information, refer to Quick Settings on page 36.) Warning! This device does not support some USB storage media devices. (For more information, refer to Galaxy Tab Accessories on page 17.) Front View The following items can be found on the front of your device as illustrated. 1. External Speakers: Used in music or video playback, 2. 3. notification tones, and for other sounds. Light Sensor: Used to control screen brightness automatically and when taking photos with the front-facing Camera. Front-facing Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or recording videos. 1 2 3 1 4 Understanding Your Device 21 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Top View The following items can be found on the top of your device as illustrated. 1. Power/Lock Key: Press and hold to turn the device on or off. Press to lock the device or to wake the screen for unlocking. 2. Volume Key: From a Home screen, press to adjust Master Volume. During music playback, press to adjust volume. 3. Memory Card Slot: Install a memory 4. card for storage of files. Infrared Blaster: Used to emit infrared signals used for controlling external devices. For more information, refer to Smart Remote on page 161. 5. 3.5mm Headset Jack: Plug in for headphones. 6. SIM Card Port: Insert your SIM card here. 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 Back and Bottom Views The following items can be found on the back and bottom of your device. 1. Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or recording videos. 2. Microphone: Used for video chat. 3. Charger/Accessory Port: Plug in a USB cable for charging or to sync music and files. 1 2 3 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY S Pen With the S Pen stylus, you can do anything you can do with one finger, only more accurately. Removing the S Pen From Your Tablet The S Pen is conveniently stored in your tablet to protect it and to keep it available. 2 1 You can also use the S Pen with compatible applications, such as S Note or Photoshop Touch, to do things you cannot do with your finger. 1. Stylus tip: Used for touching and dragging accross the screen. 2. Pen button: Used to access additional functions for the S Pen. (For more information, refer to Using the S Pen on page 25.) Tip: Removing the S Pen awakens your tablets screen (if dark), unlocks the screen if the lock is set to Swipe, and launches the S Pen App Tray. (For more information, refer to S Pen App Tray on page 46.) To remove the S Pen, follow these steps:

1. Locate the S Pen at the lower right corner of the device (1). 2. Use your fingernail or a sharp object to pull the end of the S Pen out of the device (2). Understanding Your Device 23 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Rich S Pen Functionality

Air View: Hover S Pen over the screen to preview information.

Effectively express yourself: Write/Draw directly into an email, or the calendar, annotate Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF documents, capture your ideas in S Note, write a note on the back of the picture.

Quick Command: Launch Quick Command to activate frequently used applications or actions. Press the S Pen button and then drag the S Pen up the screen to display the Quick Command window.

Easy Clip: Instantly outline and crop anything on the screen and freely edit or share with others. 3. Pull the S Pen out of the device (3). 24 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Using the S Pen There are several different functions you can perform using the S Pen. S Pen Screen Operations The S Pen can be used for various screen operations.

Touch a command button, such as Back, or icons, such as Email, with the S Pen instead of your finger. Apps or Back Function To move to a previous screen, hold the S Pen button and touch and drag the screen as shown in the illustration below. The previous screen displays. The result is the same at touching the button or icon with your finger.

To sweep a list or menu, touch and drag the screen up or down.

To sweep to the next Home screen panel, touch and drag the screen to the left or right. Press S Pen Button Understanding Your Device 25 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Menu Button To display the menu from any screen, hold the S Pen button and touch and drag the screen as shown in the illustration below. The menu displays. Launch Popup Note Popup Note is an application that you can launch from any screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas. To open Popup Note, hold the S Pen button and double-tap the screen. Tip: You can also change the Lock screens settings to let you launch Popup Note from the Lock screen. (For more information, refer to Lock screen on page 188.) Press S Pen button 26 Press S Pen button Tip: To take more complex notes, access the full S Note application. (See S Note on page 158.) DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Screen Capture To take a screen capture, press and hold the S Pen button and touch and hold the S Pen anywhere on the screen. Files are saved in the My Files All files sdcard0 Pictures Screenshots folder. You can also find them in your Gallery in the Screenshots album. Write on any Screen after Capture To write on a screen capture, use the pen to draw or write. Files are saved in the My Files All files sdcard0 Pictures Screenshots folder. Press S Pen button Press S Pen button For information on using your S Pen with the S Note application, see S Note on page 158. Understanding Your Device 27 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Air view When you hold the S Pen near the screen, a pointer appears on the screen. Move the pointer to files, subjects, or options to preview the contents or view information in pop-up windows. Home Screen The Home screen is the starting point for using your tablet. Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen. 1. Google Search: Search the web by typing or speaking. For more information, refer to Google on page 149. 2. Home screen: The starting point for using your device. Place shortcuts, widgets and other items to customize your device to your needs. 3. Panel Indicator: Indicates which Home screen panel is displayed. For more information, refer to Extended Home Screen on page 30. 4. Widget: Applications that run on the Home screen panels. (For more information, refer to Widgets on page 41.) 5. Apps: Display the Apps screen. 6. Back: Return to the previous screen or option. 7. Home: Display the central Home screen. Touch and hold to display the Task Manager pop-up. You can scroll through panels or lists by moving the pointer to an edge (top/bottom/left/right) of the screen. 28 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 8. Recent Apps: Open a list of thumbnail images of apps you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open it. Touch Task manager to display the Task Manager. 9. Quick Launch: This soft key can be set to launch several different applications. The default setting is Screen capture. (For more information, refer to Quick launch on page 183.) 10. App Shortcuts: Shortcuts to applications. (For more information, refer to App Shortcuts on page 40.) 11. Mini App Tray: Shortcuts to apps that you can use anytime, such as a Alarm, Calculator, and Calendar.

(For more information, refer to Mini App Tray on page 44.) 12. System Bar: The area along the bottom of the Home screen where you can find navigation buttons and icons that show notifications, battery power, and connection details. 13. Notification Icons: Presents icons to show notifications from the system or from an application. Touch a Notification Icon to display more detail. (For a list of icons, see Status Bar on page 39.) 14. Time: The current time. (For more information, refer to Date and time on page 201.) 15. Status Icons: Indicate the status of your tablet. Touch the Time / Status Icons area to display the Status Details panel. (For more information, refer to Status Bar on page 39.) Understanding Your Device 29 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. Under Add to Home screen the following options are available:

Apps and widgets: Add application shortcuts or widgets to the current Home screen panel.

Folder: Add a folder to the current Home screen panel. (For more information, refer to Folders on page 42.)

Page: Add a Home screen panel. (For more information, refer to Adding Home Screen Panels on page 31.) Note: The center panel displays when you touch Home. Display Settings You can customize display screen settings to your preferences. (For more information, refer to Display on page 182.) Extended Home Screen The Home screen consists of the Home panel and four additional panels that extend beyond the display width to provide more space for adding shortcuts and widgets. Slide your finger left and right across the screen to scroll to other Home screen panels. As you scroll, the indicator at the top of the screen shows the currently displayed Home screen panel. Customizing the Home Screen Panels To customize the Home screen panels to suit your preferences:

1. Navigate to one of the Home screen panels. 2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen pop-up appears. 3. To change the Home screen and/or Lock screen wallpaper, touch Set wallpaper. (For more information, refer to Wallpapers on page 43.) 30 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Adding Home Screen Panels Your device comes with five active Home screen panels. You can add panels to a maximum of 7. Removing Home Screen Panels You can remove (disable) Home screen panels you arent using. Note: Home screen panel 3, the center panel, displays when you touch Home. 1. Touch and hold on a Home screen panel until the Home screen pop-up displays. Under Add to Home screen, touch Page. or From a Home screen panel, pinch the screen from the left and right side to the center to display the editing screen. Then touch on a panel to add (enable) it. 1. From a Home screen panel, pinch the screen from the left and right side to the center to display the editing screen. 2. To remove (disable) a Home screen panel, touch the unwanted panel and drag it over the The contents of the selected panel are erased and replaced with

. Remove icon. 3. Touch Back to return to the Home screen. Rearranging Home Screen Panels You can change the order the Home screen panels appear when you swipe across the home screen. 1. From a Home screen panel, pinch the screen from the left and right side to the center to display the editing screen. 2. To rearrange the order of panels, touch and drag a panel to a new location. 3. Touch Back to return to the Home screen. Understanding Your Device 31 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Selecting a New Home Screen You can change which Home screen panel appears you touch Home. 1. From a Home screen panel, pinch the screen from the left and right side to the center to display the editing screen. 2. To select a new Home screen, touch in the upper Navigating Your Device Use command buttons and the touch screen to navigate. Command Buttons Back Touch step. Back to return to the previous screen, option, or right corner of the desired panel. Note: When the on-screen keyboard is active, Close 3. Touch Back to return to your new Home screen. Keyboard replaces Back. Home to return to the Home screen. Home Touch Recent Apps Recent Apps to open a list of thumbnail images of Touch apps you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open it. Touch Remove all to clear all thumbnail images. Touch Task manager to display the Task Manager. 32 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Screen Capture 1. Touch Screen Capture to capture and add an image of the current screen to the clipboard. 2. Touch and hold Screen Capture to capture an image of the current screen and edit the image, then touch Save to save the image. Note: A copy of the screenshot is automatically saved to the clipboard. To view the screen shots:

1. From a Home screen, touch Apps My Files. 2. Touch sdcard Pictures Screenshots. 3. Touch a screen capture file to display it. Note: This soft key can be modified to launch other applications. (For more information, refer to Quick launch on page 183.) Menu to display a list of options. Google to search the web or your device. Other Buttons Google Search Touch Context-Sensitive Menus Context-sensitive menus offer options for features or screens. To access context-sensitive menus:

Touch

Touch an option in the list. Application Bar The Application Bar is the area along the top of various application screens. It usually contains Search and Menu buttons, as well as other buttons that are used to display options and settings. Screen Navigation Touch Touch items to select or launch them. For example:

Touch the on-screen keyboard to enter characters or text.

Touch a menu item to select it.

Touch an application icon to launch the related application. Understanding Your Device 33 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Touch and Hold Activate on-screen items. For example:

Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.

Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options. Swipe, Flick, or Slide Swipe, flick, or slide your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen. For example:

Unlocking the screen.

Scrolling the Home screens or a menu. Pinch Use two fingers, such as your index finger and thumb, to make an inward pinch motion on the screen, as if you are picking something up, or an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out. For example, pinch a photo in the Gallery app or a web page in the Internet app to zoom in or out. 34 Using Motions By activating the various gesture features within the Motion Settings menu, you can access a variety of time saving functions. To activate motion:

1. From the Home screen, touch the Time / Status Icons area to display the Status Details panel. (For more information, refer to Status Bar on page 39.) 2. Touch Settings Motion. 3. Touch the ON/OFF slider OFF of the screen to activate motion. located at the top 4. Touch the check box located to the right of each motion option you wish to activate. A check mark will appear. The following is a description of the available gestures:

Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the display. Tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.

Pan to move icon: Once enabled, you must be on a Home screen panel. Touch and hold a desired application shortcut icon or widget on the screen until it detaches. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Move the device left or right to migrate it to a new location.

Pan to browse images: Once enabled, Touch and hold a desired on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan vertically. Move the device up and down to pan horizontally around the large on-screen image. Notifications When you receive a notification, the Notification icon displays in the System Bar, to the left of the Time. Notifications indicate the arrival of Gmail, Email, alarms, and more.

For more detail, touch a Notification icon. For example, touch a Gmail Notification icon to see who sent the message.

To open the Notifications list to view all of your current notifications, touch the Time field. To display a Notification in the list, touch the item. For example, touch a Gmail entry to open the Gmail application and view the message. Most apps that send notifications, such as Email and Gmail, have individual settings that can be configured. See the settings for individual applications in the applicable section of this user manual. Understanding Your Device 35 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Status Details To display the current date and time, battery status, and Wi-Fi connectivity status, open Status Details. 1. Touch the Time in the Status Bar. The Status Details display. If you have any current notifications, their summaries are listed below the Notifications title. 2. Touch a notification summary to respond to it. 3. Touch outside the Status Details screen to close the window. Quick Settings To view and control the most common settings for your tablet, as well as accessing the complete Settings application, open the Quick Settings panel. 1. Touch the Time in the System Bar. The Quick Settings pop-up displays. 36 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 2. Touch the time at the top of the pop-up to display a

Bluetooth: Touch to enable or disable Bluetooth. For more Date and time pop-up. The following options are available:

Touch Automatic date and time or Automatic time zone to use network-provided date and time or time zone.

Touch Use 24-hour format to enable the 24-hour format.

Touch Manual setup to display the Date & time settings screen. (For more information, refer to Date and time on page 201.) 3. The Quick Settings are:

Wi-Fi: Touch to enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to Wi-Fi on page 120.

GPS: Touch to enable or disable Standalone GPS services.

(For more information, refer to Location services on page 187.)

Sound / Mute: Touch to enable or disable sound mode.

Screen rotation: When On the screen rotates automatically from landscape to portrait and vice versa. When Off the screen is fixed in the current mode, either portrait or landscape. (For more information, refer to Quick Settings on page 36.) information, refer to Bluetooth on page 122. Sweep the pop-up to the left to see additional settings.

Mobile data: Disables mobile data so you can no longer use applications such as Browser, Email, and YouTube using a mobile network.

Blocking mode:

Power saving: When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power. (For more information, refer to Power saving mode on page 185.)

AllShare Cast:

Sync: Synchronizes your device with the network. Synchronizes contacts, email, time, and a variety of accounts. These additional options are available:

Brightness: Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or touch Auto to allow the device to set brightness automatically based on available light and battery charge status. (For more information, refer to Brightness on page 182.)

Settings: Touch to open the Settings application. For more information, refer to Settings on page 168. Understanding Your Device 37 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Notifications: Displays system notifications. For more information, refer to Notifications on page 35. 4. Touch Clear to remove Notification Icons from the System Bar. 5. Touch a notification entry to display the details. 6. Close the Quick Settings by touching X in the upper, right corner of the Quick Settings pop-up or by touching outside the Quick Settings screen. Notifications Quick Settings also displays icons under the Notifications heading to alert you to activity on the tablet such as new messages, application downloads, software updates, and more. The following table lists those icons. Download Successful: A recent application download or update completed successfully. New Email Message: You have new email. Touch Reply to view and answer the email. New Gmail Message: You have new Gmail. Touch the icon for additional information. 38 Google Talk Invitation: Someone has invited you to chat using Google Talk. Wi-Fi networks available: An open Wi-Fi network is in range. Wi-Fi Connected: Your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network. Samsung account: Set up your Samsung account.

(For more information, refer to Samsung Account on page 10.) Software update: There is a software update available for this device. Updates Available: Updates to the applications you have downloaded are available. SIM Installed: A SIM card is installed in your tablet. No SIM: A SIM card has not been installed in your tablet. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Status Bar The Status Bar is part of the System Bar and displays icons to show network status, battery power, and other details. Battery Fully Charged: When the battery is fully charged, this indicator is displayed. Battery Level: Shown fully charged. Charging Indicator: Battery is charging. Device Power Critical: Battery has only three percent power remaining. At about 15 percent power remaining, a popup is displayed to remind you to charge immediately. USB Connection Indicator: The device is connected to a computer using a USB cable, but it is not charging. The battery is only charged while connected to a computer, if the device is turned off. When the device is off, press the Power/Lock key to see the battery charging indicator. Download in progress: An application is being downloaded to the device. Airplane Mode: Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active, which allows you to use many of your devices features, but it cannot access online information or applications. Set up input methods: When the keyboard is being displayed, touch this icon to display a menu of quick keyboard settings. Bluetooth Active: Bluetooth is turned on. For more information, refer to Bluetooth on page 122. Bluetooth Connected: Your device is connected to a Bluetooth device. Wi-Fi Active: Wi-Fi is connected, active, and communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP). Signal Strength: Displays your current signal strength. The greater the number of bars, the stronger the signal. Understanding Your Device 39 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY GPS Active: Displays when GPS is active. Alarm Set: Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified time. (For more information, refer to Alarm on page 137.) Event: This is a notification for one or more events.

(For more information, refer to Creating an Event or Task on page 142.) Screenshot Captured: A screenshot has been captured. (For more information, refer to Screen Capture on page 33.) Nearby Devices: The Nearby devices setting is enabled. (For more information, refer to Nearby devices on page 178.) App Shortcuts Use App Shortcuts for quick access to applications or features, such as Email or Camera. 1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to place the App Shortcut. Apps. 2. Touch or Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen options pop-up displays. Under Add to Home screen touch Apps and widgets. 3. Touch the Apps tab. 4. Touch and hold the application icon, then slide your finger where you want to place the icon and release it.

(For a list of applications, see Apps Screen on page 134.) 5. Touch and hold the App Shortcut and then drag the application icon to reposition it on the Home screen. 40 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Removing App Shortcuts Touch and hold the App Shortcut until Delete displays at the top of the screen, then drag the App Shortcut to the Delete icon. Widgets When you first turn on your tablet, there are various widgets on the center Home screen. They can also appear on the Home screens to the left and right of the center Home screen. Widgets are self-contained applications that you can place on the Home screens to access your favorite features. Adding Widgets to a Home screen 1. Navigate to the Home screen panel on which you want to place the Widget. 2. From that Home screen panel, touch Apps. or Touch and hold on the Home screen panel until the Home screen options pop-up displays. Under Add to Home screen touch Apps and widgets. 3. Touch the Widgets tab. Note: Swipe across the screen horizontally to view all Widgets. 4. Touch and hold the Widgets icon, then slide your finger where you want to place the icon and release it. Understanding Your Device 41 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Note: There must be room on the screen where you want to place the widget, otherwise the widget will not add to the Home screen. 5. Touch Back to return to the Home screen. Removing Widgets Touch and hold the Widget until the Remove icon displays at the top of the screen, then drag the Widget and drop it over the Remove icon. Folders Place Folders on the Home screen to organize items together on the Home screen. Adding Folders To create a folder on a Home page:

1. Navigate to the desired Home screen. 2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen pop-up displays. 3. Under Add to Home screen touch Folder. A new folder displays on the Home screen. 42 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Wallpapers You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen, Lock screen, or on both the Home and Lock screens. Choose from preloaded wallpaper images or select a photo you have downloaded or taken with the Camera. 1. From a Home screen, touch and hold on the screen. The Home screen options pop-up displays. 2. Touch Set wallpaper for. The Set wallpaper for pop-up displays. 3. Touch Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens. Managing Folders To name a folder:

Touch the folder, touch the Unnamed folder field, and use the keyboard to enter a name for the folder. To add an App shortcut to a folder:

1. Add the App shortcut to the Home screen that the folder is on. 2. Touch and hold the App shortcut, drag it to the folder, and drop it. To remove an App shortcut from a folder:

1. Touch the folder to view the contents. 2. Touch the App shortcut, drag it out of the folder, and drop it on the Home screen. Removing a Folder Touch and hold the folder until the Delete icon displays, then drag the folder toward the top of the screen and drop it over the Delete icon. Note: Any App shortcuts in the folder are deleted. Understanding Your Device 43 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY The Select wallpaper from pop-up displays the following options:

Gallery: Access the Gallery to select a photo. Touch a photo to select it. Crop and resize the picture, if desired. Touch Done to save the picture as wallpaper. Touch Cancel to cancel.

Live wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded interactive animated wallpapers. Touch a wallpaper to see an example. If available, touch Settings to view options for the selection. Touch Set wallpaper to save your choice. Touch the Live wallpapers menu. Back to return to

Wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded wallpaper images. Touch an image to view it. Touch Set wallpaper to save it as wallpaper. Touch Back to return to the Home screen. Note: Live wallpapers is not available for the Lock screen. Mini App Tray There are shortcuts available that link to apps that you might need while working in other apps, such as Alarm, Calculator, Calendar, Email, Music Player, Task manager, and World Clock. In some cases, these shortcuts are actually links to the part of the app you need most and they contain a link to the actual app where you can use other functions. 1. From any screen, touch Mini App Tray at the bottom, center of the screen. The Mini App Tray icons display. 2. Touch one of the icons to display a mini app pop-up. The pop-up varies depending on the application. Various controls display at the top of the pop-up and other information is displayed in the body of the pop-up. 44 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. Touch options (such as

) to create new app items

(such as alarms or events). 4. Touch items in the body of the pop-up, such as an email entry or keys on the Calculator. 5. Touch to link to the application. (For more information, refer to Changing the Apps Screen on page 134.) 6. Touch 7. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray to customize the to close the mini app pop-up. Mini App Tray. (For more information, refer to Customizing the Mini App Tray on page 45.) Customizing the Mini App Tray You can choose applications to display on the Mini App Tray and arrange them in any order. 1. From any screen, touch Mini App Tray at the bottom, center of the screen. The Mini App Tray pops up at the bottom of the screen. 2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray. 3. To remove an app from the Mini App Tray, touch the app icon. The icon disappears from the Mini App Tray and jumps to the Mini App Tray applications list. 4. To change the location of an app icon in the Mini App Tray, touch and drag the icon to another position in the tray. 5. Touch Done to save your changes. Understanding Your Device 45 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY PS (Photoshop) Touch: Combine images, apply effects, and share your results with friends and family through social networking sites.

Polaris Office: Manage your Office documents online or offline.

(For more information, refer to Polaris Office on page 157.)

S Pen Settings: Tailor your tablets responses to your use of the S Pen, such as, when you remove the S Pen from its slot, whether to play sounds and what action to take or app to launch. (For more information, refer to S Pen on page 200.) 2. To launch an app in the S Pen App Tray, touch the apps icon with your S Pen. S Pen App Tray The S Pen App Tray gives you quick access to the S Pen-

enabled applications on your tablet. 1. Remove the S Pen from its storage slot at the bottom right side of your tablet. The S Pen App Tray pops-up on the side of the display, with the following applications available:

Popup Note: Handwrite, draw, save, and share quick memos.

S Note: Create notes with productivity tools that turn handwriting into typed text and correct drawn shapes, lines, and formulas to make them perfect. (For more information, refer to S Note on page 158.)

Calendar: Record events and appointments to manage your schedule. A shortcut to Calendar displays on a Home screen by default. (For more information, refer to Calendar on page 141.)

Crayon physics: Your drawings are transformed into physical objects in a game in which you solve puzzles with your artistic vision and creative use of physics. 46 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 3: Entering Text This section describes how to enter words, letters, punctuation and numbers when you need to enter text. Samsung Keyboard Your device uses a virtual QWERTY keyboard for text entry called the Samsung keyboard. Use the keyboard to enter letters, punctuation, numbers, and other characters into text entry fields or applications. Access the keyboard by touching any text entry field. The keyboard displays at the bottom of the screen. By default, when you rotate the device, the screen orientation updates to display the keyboard at the bottom of the screen. Text Input Methods Your device offers two text input methods.

Google voice typing: You can use your voice to enter text using the Voice input feature. Your device recognizes your speech and enters text for you. For more information, refer to Using Speech Recognition on page 55.

Samsung keyboard: The Samsung keyboard is also a virtual QWERTY keyboard that allows you to enter text by touching keys on the screen. The Samsung keyboard includes predictive text, which matches your key touches to common words so that you can select the word to enter it into your text. Changing the Input Method When entering text, you can select the text input method. Set up input methods in the Status bar. 1. Touch The Set up input methods pop-up displays. 2. Touch an input method to activate it. 3. Touch to display that input methods settings.

(For more information, refer to Keyboards and input methods on page 193.) Entering Text 47 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Using the Samsung Keyboard The Samsung keyboard is a custom virtual QWERTY keyboard, featuring predictive text. Input characters by touching the on-screen keys with your finger or use speech recognition. As you enter characters, predictive text matches your key touches to common words and displays them. Select a word from the display to insert it into your text. For more information, refer to Using XT9 Predictive Text on page 49. Your tablet also provides handwriting recognition to make the task of text entry that much easier. Delete Key New Paragraph Shift Key Space Bar Select Language Remove Keyboard Settings/

Voice Input/

Handwriting/

Clipboard Text Input Mode 48 Configuring the Keyboard To configure the Samsung keyboard to your preferences:

Touch Set up input methods in the Status bar and next to Samsung keyboard in the Set then touch up input methods pop-up. or Touch and hold Settings. to Options on the keyboard and slide The Samsung keyboard settings screen displays.

(For more information, refer to Keyboards and input methods on page 193.) Entering Upper and Lower Case Letters The default case is lower case (abc). Enter upper and lower case alphabet letters by touching the Shift key to toggle the case, before touching the letter key(s).

Touch once to switch from abc to Abc mode.

Touch twice to switch to ABC mode. When ABC mode is enabled, the Shift key background turns blue. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY to switch to the to switch to Symbols Entering Symbols and Numbers The number keys are displayed at the top of the keyboard and are always available. To enter common symbols, touch mode, then touch the corresponding key. There are two pages of symbols. Touch next page. Touch and hold a vowel key (A, E, I, O, U, or Y) or the C, N, or S key to open a small window where you can chose an accented vowel or other alternate letter. Slide to the letter until it is highlighted, and release. Touch and hold the Period key ( . ) to open a small window with a set of common symbols. Other Keyboard Functions Touch has been set. The current language displays on the space bar. Handwriting to Touch and hold use the Handwriting feature. (For more information, refer to Using the Handwriting Feature on page 53.) Touch and hold view the clipboard and manage saved text. to select the language, if more than one language Options and slide to Options and slide to Clipboard to Using XT9 Predictive Text XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards. 1. Touch Set up input methods in the Status bar. The Set up input methods pop-up displays. 2. Touch Set up input methods. The Language and input settings screen displays. 3. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display Samsung keyboard settings. 4. Touch the Predictive text OFF / ON icon to turn Predictive text ON. 5. Touch the Predictive text field to modify XT9 associated settings. (For more information, refer to Keyboards and input methods on page 193.) Note: The XT9 option is available only when ABC mode has been selected. Entering Text 49 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 6. Begin typing a word. A list of word options displays. Adding Words To Your Word List To add more word options:

1. Touch Set up input methods in the Status bar. The Set up input methods pop-up displays. 2. Touch Set up input methods. The Language and input settings screen displays. 3. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display Samsung keyboard settings. 4. Touch My word list. 5. Touch 6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the word. 7. Touch Done. Add. Deleting Words From Your Word List To delete words from your word list:

1. Navigate to My word list. For more information, refer to Adding Words To Your Word List on page 50. 2. Touch 3. Touch the existing words you want to delete or touch Delete. Select all, and then touch Delete. 4. Touch Delete. 7. Touch to display more words. To add more words, see Adding Words To Your Word List on page 50. 8. Continue typing your message. XT9 mode can be used in portrait or landscape mode. 50 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Editing Text You can edit the text you enter in text fields by cutting, copying, or pasting text. These operations can be performed within and across apps. However, some apps do not support editing some or all of the text displayed while others may offer their own way to select text. Editing Existing Text To edit text that you have entered:

1. Touch the text at the point you want to edit. The Cursor displays at the point you touched. 2. Touch and drag the Cursor to a better position, if necessary. 3. Enter additional text or delete text by repeatedly touching the Delete key. Copying, Deleting, or Replacing Text To select and copy, delete, or replace text:

2. Touch and drag either tab to select more or less text. Tip: Touch Select all in the Application bar to select all text in the field. Touch on another area of the screen or touch Done to deselect the text. 3. Depending on the action you want to take for the selected text, in the Application bar touch:

Select all to highlight all text in the field.

Cut to remove the selected text.

Copy to save the selected text to the clipboard. or Enter text by typing or speaking to replace the selection with what you type. or Touch the Delete key to delete the selected text. 1. Touch and hold the text or word you want to select. tab at The selected text is highlighted with a each end of the selection. Entering Text 51 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Using T9 Trace T9 Trace allows you to enter words by gliding your finger over the virtual QWERTY keypad, lifting your finger between words. To enable T9 Trace:

1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings Language and input. 2. Touch next to Samsung keyboard. The Samsung keyboard settings screen displays. 3. Touch T9 Trace to enable the T9 Trace option. When enabled, a check mark box. appears in the check The following example shows how to enter the word this. Put your finger down on the t and, without lifting, glide it to the h, then to the i, then over to the s. Pasting Text To paste previously copied text:

1. Touch the text at the point you want to paste the copied text. The Cursor displays at the point you touched. 2. Touch the Cursor. A pop-up displays. 3. Touch Paste in the pop-up. To paste text directly from the clipboard:

1. Touch and hold Options and slide to Clipboard to display the text saved to the clipboard. 2. Touch a text block to paste that text where the Cursor is positioned. Closing the Keyboard To close the keyboard:

Touch Close Keyboard. 52 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Punctuation: Touch and hold a key to view a punctuation menu and make a selection.

Error correction: If you make a mistake, double-tap on the word you want to change and then glide over the letters of the correct word. Using the Handwriting Feature You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite letters on your screen. 2. 1. From a screen where you can enter text, activate the keyboard by touching a text input field on the screen. Set up input methods in the If necessary, touch Status bar and then touch Samsung keyboard. The Samsung keyboard displays. 3. Touch and hold Options and slide to Handwriting. The handwriting pad displays. 4. Use your finger tip to write out each character. Note: To properly recognize the written characters and to prevent scratching of the LCD, do not use script. Entering Text 53 Here are a few tips to get you started:

Auto-spacing: When you finish a word, just lift your finger and start the next word.

Double letters: Just scribble on the key.

Auto-capitalization: T9 Trace recognizes and capitalizes the first word of sentences. If you want to capitalize a word that is not at the beginning of a sentence, touch the Shift key and then glide over the letters in the word.

Contractions: T9 Trace recognizes most words that include an apostrophe, just swipe the letters of the word, including the apostrophe. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY As you write, suggestions are offered in the word options area in case the correct letters were not recognized. Handwriting Tips

For uppercase letters, write the letter larger than the lowercase Settings/

Voice Input/

Keyboard/

Clipboard Numbers and Symbols Word Options Text Input Mode Input Writing /

Line Return Remove Keyboard Space Bar Delete Key Select Language Handwriting area 54 letters.

Write a dash (horizontal line) to add a space.

Delete words by sweeping backward across them.

To display numbers and symbols, touch and then touch a number or symbol key. Touch the button marked 1/3, 2/3, or 3/3 to see more symbols and emoticons. Touch numbers and symbols keyboard. to exit the

To return to the Samsung keyboard, touch and hold Options and slide to Handwriting Settings To change the Handwriting settings:

Keyboard. 1. Touch and then touch Set up input methods. The Language and input settings screen displays. 2. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display Samsung keyboard settings. 3. Touch Handwriting. The following settings can be changed:

DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Recognition time: Set the time it takes for your tablet to recognize what you write. Choose from 100ms, 300ms, 500ms, 1000ms, or 2000ms.

Pen thickness: Change the pen thickness to 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 pixels, as the examples demonstrate.

Pen color: Change the pen color to black, red, blue, green, or brown.

Recognition type: Set the way your tablet recognizes what you write. Complete recognition: The letters are not entered in the text Enter, which gives you time to choose field until you touch word options. Stroke recognition: The letters are entered in the text field as you write.

Gesture guide: Displays a list of gesture that can be used with the handwriting feature.

Tutorial: Displays information for entering handwritten text.

About: Describes the version, date, and manufacturer of the handwriting software. 4. Press repeatedly to return to your message. Using Speech Recognition You can use your voice to enter text using the Voice input feature, which lets you enter text by speaking. The Samsung keyboard recognizes your speech and enters text for you. 1. Touch Set up input methods in the Status bar and then touch Google voice typing in the Set up input methods pop-up to enable Voice Input. or Touch Settings and slide to Voice Input.

(For more information, refer to Speech on page 196.) 2. At the Listening prompt, speak clearly and distinctly into the microphone. The software converts your voice to text, which is displayed in the message. 3. Keep speaking to add more test. 4. Touch Done to display the Samsung keyboard. Note: The Speech Recognition feature works best when you break your message down into smaller segments. Entering Text 55 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Setting Up Your Accounts Set up and manage your synchronized accounts with the Accounts and sync setting. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings Accounts and sync. 2. Touch 3. Follow the prompts to enter your account credentials to Add account, then touch the account type. complete the set-up process. 4. The device communicates with account servers to set up your account. When complete, your account displays in the Manage accounts area of the Accounts and sync screen. Section 4: Contacts and Accounts This section explains how to manage contacts and accounts. Accounts Your device can synchronize with a variety of accounts. With synchronization, information on your device is updated with any information that changes in your accounts.

Samsung account: Add your Samsung account. (For more information, refer to Samsung Account on page 10.)

Email: Add an Email account to sync Contacts. (For more information, refer to Email on page 68.)

Facebook: Add your Facebook account to sync Contacts.

Google: Add your Google account to sync your Contacts, Calendar, and Gmail. (For more information, refer to Gmail on page 76.)

LDAP: Add an LDAP account to find entries in an LDAP directory server.

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync: Add your Exchange account to sync Contacts, Calendar, and Email. 56 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Contacts Store contact information for your friends, family, and colleagues to quickly access information or to send a message. Tip: Contacts displays by default as a Primary shortcut on a Home screen. To access Contacts:

From a Home screen, touch Contacts. or From a Home screen, touch Apps Contacts. Creating Contacts 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Device or an account. 3. Touch the Photo ID to set up a photo to identify the Contacts . contact.

Picture: Choose a photo from the Gallery.

Take picture: Display the Camera and take a photo of the contact. 4. Touch contact fields to display the keyboard and enter information:

Tip: Touch the screen and swipe up or down to display additional fields or touch Next on the keyboard to move to the next field.

Name: Enter a first name for the contact. Touch to enter a Name prefix, First name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.

Phone: Enter a telephone number, then touch the Label tab to choose a label from Mobile, Home, Work, Work Fax, Home Fax, Pager, Other, Custom, or Callback. Contacts and Accounts 57 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Email: Enter an email address, then touch the Label tab 8. When you finish entering information, touch Save. or Touch changes. Cancel OK to cancel and discard Tip: Display a contacts record and touch the Email field to send an email, touch the Address field to display the address on a map, or touch the Website field to link to the website. to choose a label from Home, Work, Other, or Custom to create a custom label.

Address: Enter an address, then touch the Label tab to choose a label from Home, Work, Other, or Custom to create a custom label.

Events: Touch to display an event label and field. Enter the event date, then touch the from Birthday, Anniversary, Other, or Custom to create a custom event. Touch to add additional events. Label tab to choose a label

Groups: Touch this field to display the Select group screen. To assign the contact to one or more groups, touch the check box next to each group. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. For more information about Groups, see Groups on page 63. 5. Touch to add additional fields.Touch to remove an unused field. 6. Touch Add another field to add these additional fields:

Phonetic name, Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website, Internet call, and Relationship. 7. Touch Back to remove the keyboard. 58 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Updating Contacts To update an existing contact:

Send email from Contacts To send an email to one or more contacts:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its Contacts. information. 3. Touch 4. Continue entering contact information. For more Edit. information, refer to Creating Contacts on page 57. Deleting Contacts To delete a contact:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its Contacts. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Touch each contact you want to send an email Menu Send email. Contacts. message or touch Select all. A check mark indicates contact selection. Done. 4. Touch 5. Touch Compose Email or Compose Gmail. 6. Touch Use by default for this action if you want the same selection each time. 7. Compose your email, then touch Send. information, and then touch touch OK. Delete. At the prompt, Managing Photo IDs To remove or update a contacts Photo ID:

Merge Contacts with Google You can merge a current contact with your Google account contacts. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Touch OK at the prompt to merge this contact with your Menu Merge with Google. Contacts. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Touch the Photo ID, then touch Remove, Picture, or Take Contacts. Edit. picture. Google account. Contacts and Accounts 59 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Contacts Display Options There are various ways to display your Contacts and general Contacts settings. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Groups, Favorites, or Contacts, above the Contacts. 3. From the Contacts list, touch Menu to display all or some of these options:

Delete contacts. Touch and check mark the box next to each contact you want to delete. Touch Delete and then touch OK.

Merge with Google: Merges the current contact with your Contacts List, to view contacts various ways:

Groups: Displays the possible Groups, such as Not assigned, Co-workers, Family, Friends, and so on. The number of contacts in the group is displayed next to the group name. Touch a group name to show only contacts in that group. For more information, refer to Creating a New Group on page 64.

Favorites: Show only your favorite, or starred, contacts. For more information, refer to Favorites on page 65.

Contacts: Show all your contacts. Touch the Search field and enter a keyword to list contacts that contain that keyword. Google account contacts.

Send email: Sends an email to the selected contact.

History: Displays information about the selected contact.

Join contact: Join a contact to one or more other contacts. For more information, refer to Joining Contacts on page 62.

Mark as default: If a contact has multiple email addresses, for example, touch the field that should be the default value.

Share namecard via: Shares the selected namecard using Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or through Wi-Fi Direct.

Print namecard: Check mark the fields you want to print and then touch Done. You can only print on a Samsung printer.

Contacts to display: Select the contacts you want to display in this inbox (All contacts, Google, SIM, Device, or Customized list). 60 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Import/Export: Use the USB cable to import your contacts from, or export your contacts to, a storage device, such as a PC. For more information, refer to Importing and Exporting Contacts on page 63.

Accounts: Displays the Accounts and sync screen so you can manage or synchronize this account.

Settings: Configure contact settings:

Only contacts with phones: Touch to check the box to only display contacts that have phone numbers. List by: List contacts by First name or Last name. Display contacts by: Display contact names as First name first or Last name first.

Send individual namecards: Allows you to transmit single contacts, one at a time. The recipient must accept each namecard as it is received. This method of transmission ensures all contacts are received. 4. From the Groups list, select a group and then touch Menu to display these Group-specific options:

Search: Search the group for a contact.

Delete: Touch one or more groups and touch

Edit: Change the Group name or touch Add member to add or Delete. delete group members.

Remove member: Remove a selected member from this Contact sharing settings: Sets parameters for sending group. contact information:

Send all namecards: Allows you to transmit all of your current Contact entries at a single time. If the recipient device does not support this feature, some or all Contact entries might not be received.

Send email: To send an email to one or more members of the group, touch and check mark the box next to each contact you want to send to, or touch Select all, and touch Touch Compose Gmail or Compose Email as the method for sending the email. Done.

Change order: Changes the order of how the groups display. Contacts and Accounts 61 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Linked Contacts Your device can synchronize with multiple accounts, including Google, Corporate Exchange, and other email providers. When you synchronize contacts from these accounts with your device, you may have multiple contacts for one person. Linking, or joining, imported contact records allows you to see all the contacts numbers and addresses together in one contact entry. Linking also helps you keep your contacts updated, because any changes that your contacts make to their information in the respective accounts is automatically updated the next time you synchronize with the account. Joining Contacts 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its Contacts. information. 3. Touch 4. Touch the contact you want to Join. Join contact. Menu The joined contacts information is displayed with the original contacts information. 5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to join other contacts. 62 Separating Contacts 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its Contacts. information. 3. Touch Menu Separate contact. A list of Joined contacts displays. 4. Touch OK to separate a joined contact. The contact is removed from the list. Sharing Contact Information You can send a contacts information by way of Bluetooth to other Bluetooth devices or in an Email or Gmail as an attachment. Note: Not all Bluetooth devices accept contacts and not all devices support transfers of multiple contacts. Check the target devices documentation. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Menu Share namecard via. Contacts. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Tip: Set up a contact record for yourself to share your information with others. 3. At the prompt, choose a sending method. Options are:

Bluetooth: For more information, refer to Bluetooth on page 122. Menu Contacts. Import/Export. 2. From a Home screen, touch 3. Touch 4. Touch Import from USB storage, Export to USB storage, Import from SD card, Export to SD card, Import from SIM card, Export to SIM card, or Share namecard via, then follow the prompts to complete the operation.

Email: For more information, refer to Email on page 68.

Gmail: For more information, refer to Composing and Synchronize Contacts with Accounts To synchronize your contacts with an account:

Sending Gmail on page 78.

Wi-Fi Direct: To send Contacts entries directly to an external device through a Wi-Fi connection. 4. Follow the prompts to send the contact information. Importing and Exporting Contacts To back up and restore your contacts information, you can export your contacts list to a storage device, such as a PC, or import your contacts list (previously exported) from a storage device. 1. Use the USB cable to connect your device to the storage device. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Touch the Menu Accounts. OFF / ON icon to turn on Auto-sync. Contacts. Auto-synch controls whether changes made to information on your device or on the web are automatically synchronized with each other. to synchronize a particular account. 4. Touch Groups Assign contacts to Groups to make searching for contacts faster or to quickly send messages to group members. Contacts and Accounts 63 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Creating a New Group Create a new group when you add or edit a contact. Renaming a Group To rename a group that you created:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List. 3. Touch 4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to Contacts. enter a new Group name. 5. Touch Add member to add a member to the group. For more information, refer to Adding Group Members on page 65. 6. Touch Save to save the new group name. Tip: Contacts can belong to more than one group. Just touch the contacts Groups field and touch each group. Once you create a new group, the Contacts List can be set to display only the contacts in that group. For more information, refer to Contacts Display Options on page 60. 64 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List and then touch Contacts. the group you want to rename. 3. Touch 4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to Menu Edit. enter a new Group name. 5. Touch Add member to add a member to the group. For more information, refer to Adding Group Members on page 65. 6. Touch Save to save the new group name. Deleting Groups To delete a group that you created:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List. 3. Touch Delete. Menu Contacts. The groups that can be deleted display. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. Touch Select all or the name of each group to delete. Delete to delete the groups. Choose from 5. Touch Group only or Group and group members. Adding Group Members To add a contact to a group, just Edit a contacts Group field. For more information, refer to Updating Contacts on page 59. To add multiple contacts to a group:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Groups and then touch the group to which you Contacts. want to add members. 3. Touch Menu Add member. The contacts that can be added display. 4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to add. 5. Touch Done to add the contacts to the group. Removing Group Members To remove contacts from a group:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Groups and then touch the group from which you Contacts. want to remove members. Menu Remove member. 3. Touch 4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove. 5. Touch Done to remove the contacts. Contacts are removed from the group and the group name is removed from each contacts Group field. Favorites Mark contact records with a favorites. Adding Favorites To add a contact to the Favorites list:

gold star to identify them as 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a contact to display it. 3. Touch the turns gold Star next to the contact name so that it

. Contacts. Contacts and Accounts 65 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Removing Favorites To remove one or more contacts from your favorites list:

1. From a Home screen, touch Contacts. 2. Touch Favorites above the Contacts List. 3. Touch 4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove. 5. Touch Done to remove the contacts. Remove from favorites. Menu Tip: You do not have to edit the contact to change the Starred status. Accessing Favorites You can view your favorites two ways for fast viewing or messaging. To view your favorites list:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Favorites above the Contacts List. Contacts. Only your starred contacts display. Note: Touch Groups above the Contacts List and then touch Starred in Android to list the Favorites that are being saved on your Google account. 66 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY To remove one contact from your favorites list:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a contact to display it. 3. Touch the turns gray Star next to the contacts name so that it to remove it from the Favorites list. Contacts. Contacts and Accounts 67 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 5: Messaging This section describes how to send and receive different types of messages. It also includes the features and functionality associated with messaging. Types of Messages Your tablet provides the following message types:

Email and Gmail Messages

Google Talk

Google+

Messenger Email Use Email to view and manage all your email accounts in one application. Configuring Email Accounts 1. From the Home screen, touch Email. or From a Home screen, touch Apps Email. 2. At the Set up email screen, enter an Email address and Password, then touch Next. 68 3. Your accounts incoming server settings are different depending on the kind of email service for the account. If you are asked What type of account?, touch the type of account: POP3 account, IMAP account, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. The Server settings screen displays. Enter the required settings and touch Next. For more information, refer to Incoming Server Settings on page 75. 4. Review the Account options screen. Available options vary, depending on the provider:

Peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent to this account during peak times. Options are: Push (Automatic), Manual, every 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12 hours.

Off-peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent to this account during off-peak times. Options are: Push

(Automatic), Manual, every 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12 hours. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Period to sync email: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, set how to store email on the tablet. Options are: Automatic, All, 1 or 3 days, 1 or 2 weeks, or 1 month.

Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi-Fi: Enable or disable auto-download of files attached to recent messages when connected through Wi-Fi.

Emails retrieval size: Set the maximum email retrieval size. 5. Touch Next to go to the next screen or touch Previous to Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or100 KB, or All.

Period to sync Calendar: Set how much of the calendar for this account to sync with your tablet. Options are: 2 weeks, 1, 3, or 6 months, or All calendar.

Send email from this account by default: When enabled, email from your device is automatically sent from this account.

Notify me when email arrives: When enabled, you receive notifications when you receive new email sent to this account.

Sync Email: When enabled, email from your account is synchronized with your devices email.

Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account are synchronized with your devices Contacts.

Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are synchronized with your devices Calendar.

Sync Task: When enabled, tasks from your account are synchronized with your devices Calendar. go to the Apps screen. Note: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, the Activate device administrator? screen may appear. Read the information and touch Activate to continue. 6. Enter an account name for the email account just added, which is displayed on the email screen, and enter Your name, if required. 7. Touch Done. The device communicates with the appropriate server to set up your account and synchronize your email. When complete, your email appears in the Inbox for the account. Note: To configure email account settings at any time, use Settings. Touch the account to display Menu Account settings. Messaging 69 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Adding Additional Email Accounts To add additional email accounts:

1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Enter the Email address, Password, and so on. Settings Add account. Menu Email. Managing Your Email Accounts You can view email you receive for all accounts in the Combined view screen or you can view email accounts individually. 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Touch the drop-down menu at the top left of the Email. screen to select:

Combined view: View all email in a combined inbox.

<Account Name>: View email for the account. Managing Your Email Conversations In addition to managing your Email account, there are options for changing the status of one or more Email conversations in an account. 1. From the Home screen, touch Email. 70 2. Touch the box to the left of one or more conversations and then choose one of the following options:

Star

: Mark the conversations with a gold star and list to make the changes. them in the Starred folder. Touch or

: Touch Set to set all flags, touch Complete to mark all Flag conversations with a blue check mark, or touch Clear to clear all flags and check marks. Set flags are gold.

/ Mark as Unread

: Mark the conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is marked as read, it has a gray background.

Mark as Read

Move to

: Relocate the conversations to another folder in the current email account or in a folder within another email account.

Delete

: Delete the conversations. Menu for these options:

3. Touch

Sort by: Choose a method for listing your email conversations.

View mode: Choose how to view your email conversations. Choices are: Standard view and Conversations view.

Create folder: Create a new main folder or touch an existing folder to create a sub-folder. Note: This option is not available for all email accounts. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Delete all: Delete all items for this email account.

New meeting invitation: Use Calendar to add an event or add a task. For more information, refer to Creating an Event or Task on page 142.

Settings: Display the settings for this email account. For more information, refer to Account Settings on page 72. Composing and Sending Email 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Touch an account, if you have more than one account Email. set up, then touch Compose. 3. Enter the recipients email address in the To field.

If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message recipients as you want. to add a contact to the field.

Touch

Touch +Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients. Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients. Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.

Touch +Me to add yourself as a recipient. 4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject. 5. Touch the body of the email to enter the text of your email. 6. While composing a message, the following options may be displayed:

Priority: Set the email priority. Options are: High, Normal, or Low. Tracking options: Touch Read receipt or Delivery receipt and then touch OK to set the tracking options for this email. Security options: Set the email security options. Options are: Encrypt and Sign. Attach: Choose an attachment to add to the message from the listed apps, such as Memo, My Files, Picture, Audio, Video, and so on. Undo: Erase the previous input. Redo: Restore the previously erased input. Insert: Choose an item to insert into the message from the listed apps, such as Picture, Memo, Contacts, and so on. Messaging 71 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Insert quick response: Insert text that you frequently use in email. For more information, refer to Account Settings on page 72. Font size: Choose a text font size of 9, 10,12, 14, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 36 points. Bold: Bold the following text. Touch again to turn off bold. Italics: This action italicizes the subsequent entered text. Font color: Set the color of the text font. The bar changes to the selected color. Background color: Set the color of the background of the email. Send to send the message. Save to save the email to the Drafts folder. 7. Touch or Touch 72 Account Settings Account settings lets you configure handling of email on your device. Note: Available settings may depend on the email account and include setting how much email to synchronize, creating signatures for email you send, and other handling options. 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Touch Menu Settings, then touch General Email. Preferences. The following options display:

Auto-advance: Set the screen to show after deleting a message. Choices are: Newer message, Older message, or Message list.

Message preview line: Choose a message preview line amount. Options are: None or 1, 2, or 3 lines.

Email title: Set whether the Subject or Sender of the email is shown as the time.

Confirm deletions: Touch the box to enable or disable this indicates that deletions must be option. A check mark confirmed. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Quick responses: Edit text that you frequently use in email. Touch an email account to display the following settings:

Common settings

Account name: Enter a name to identify this account.

Your name: Enter a name to be used on email.

Signature: Touch the OFF / ON icon to turn Signature on or off. Touch Signature and enter a signature to add to email from this account.

Default account: When enabled, email from your device is automatically sent from this account.

Always Cc/Bcc myself: Lets you manage whether your email address is included in the Cc or Bcc lines.

Forward with files: Touch the check box to include any file attachments when you forward an email.

Recent messages: Limit the number of recent messages that are displayed on your device. Options are: 25, 50, 75, 100, 200, or Total.

Show images: Display images in an email. Data usage

Sync email: When enabled, email from your account is synchronized with your devices email.

Email check frequency: Set how often to check for new email sent to this account during. Options are: Never, every 15, or 30 minutes, every hour, every 4 hours, or once a day.

Auto download attachments: Enable or disable auto-download of files attached to recent messages when connected through Wi-Fi.

Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size. Options are: Headers only, 2, 50, or 100 KB, All, or All including attachments.

Auto resend times: Set the number of auto send times. Options are: No limit or 1, 3, 5, or 10 times. Exchange ActiveSync settings

Period to sync email: Set whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1 or 2 weeks, or 1 month of email on the tablet.

Empty server trash: If available, indicates whether to delete the contents in the server trash. Messaging 73 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Sync schedule: Set up your peak and off-peak schedule controls, which determines when your tablet checks the email service for new email.

Out of office settings: Lets you set how email is handled for a defined period of time, while you are unable to check your email.

Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size. Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5,10, 20, 50, or 100 KB, or All.

Period to sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are synchronized with your devices Calendar.

Security options: Set various security options for the account.

In case of sync conflict: Set whether to update the server or your tablet if there is a conflict of information between them.

Auto resend times: Set the number of auto send times. Options are: No limit or 1, 3, 5, or 10 times. Notification settings

Email notifications: When enabled, the New Email icon appears in the Status Bar when a new email arrives.

Select ringtone: Choose a ringtone for email notifications for this account. 74 Server settings

Exchange server settings: Configure incoming server settings. or Incoming settings: Configure incoming server settings. For more information, refer to Incoming Server Settings on page 75.

Outgoing settings: Configure outgoing server settings. For more information, refer to Outgoing Server Settings on page 75.

Sync Email: When enabled, email from your account is synchronized with your devices email.

Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account are synchronized with your devices Contacts.

Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are synchronized with your devices Calendar.

Sync Task: When enabled, tasks from your account are synchronized with your devices tasks. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Incoming Server Settings Your accounts exchange or incoming server settings are different, depending on the kind of email service for the account: POP3, IMAP, or Exchange ActiveSync.

Domain\ User name: If your Exchange ActiveSync server requires that you specify a domain, enter it before the backslash. Otherwise, just enter your username (the part before

@emailprovider.com in your email address) after the backslash. The backslash is optional when only entering your username. The Email app enters the correct syntax for domains and usernames when communicating with the server.

Password: The password for your email account, which should be filled in.

Exchange server / IMAP server: The fully resolved domain name of your email service providers server, for example, mail.emailprovider.com.

Use secure connection (SSL) / Security type: Check this option if your server requires you to connect to the server securely, or if you prefer to connect securely.

Use client certificate: Use a client certificate for messaging security.

Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port number if your email service provider requires it.

IMAP path prefix: Enter an IMAP path prefix, if required. Outgoing Server Settings If you use an IMAP or POP3 account for receiving email, you typically use an SMTP server to send email from that account. Exchange ActiveSync accounts do not have separate outgoing server settings.

SMTP server: The fully resolved domain name of your email service providers SMTP server, for example, smtp.emprovider.com.

Security type: Select the security type required by your email service provider. Select the SLL (Accept all certificates) option for your security type to accept a server certificate from your SMTP server that is self-signed, out of date, or in some other way not accepted by the Email application.

Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port number if your email service provider requires it. Messaging 75 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Require sign-in: Check this option to enter a username and password for your SMTP server, if your email service provider requires that you enter them to send email.

User name: Your username on the SMTP server (this may not be the same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for incoming mail). Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.

Password: Your password on the SMTP server (this may not be the same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for incoming mail). Visible only if Require sign-in is checked. Gmail Send and receive email with Gmail, Googles web-based email. Tip: To set up your Google account on your device, use Accounts and sync settings. (For more information, refer to Accounts on page 198.) From a Home screen, touch Apps Gmail. Setting Up Your Gmail Account If you did not set up a Google account during the initial configuration, the first time you launch Gmail, your device prompts you to set up your Google account. 76 Note: You can use more than one Google account on your device. To add another account, touch Menu Settings ADD ACCOUNT. 1. From a Home screen, touch The Add a Google Account screen displays. Apps Gmail. 2. Touch Existing to sign in to an existing account.

At the Sign in screen, use the on-screen keyboard to enter your Google Email name and Password, then touch Sign in. or Touch New to create a new account.

At the Your name screen, enter your first and last name, and touch Next.

At the Create email address screen follow the prompts to create a new account. The Backup and restore screen displays. 3. Read the backup and restore information, touch the option to enable or disable it, and then touch Next. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. The device communicates with the Google server to set up your account and synchronize your email. When complete, your Gmail displays in the Inbox. Refreshing Your Gmail Account Refresh your account to update your device from the Gmail servers. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Refresh in the Application Bar. Apps Gmail. Managing Your Gmail Account Use menu options to manage your Gmail account. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Menu for these options:

Apps Gmail.

Manage labels: Determine settings for each label.

Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to Gmail Account Settings on page 79.

Help: Learn about using Gmail.

Send Feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form. Managing Your Gmail Conversations In addition to managing your Gmail account, there are options for changing the status of one or more Gmail conversations in an account. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch the gray box to the left of one or more Apps Gmail. conversations and then choose one of the following options:

Archive

: Archive the conversations. Archived conversations are assigned to the All Mail folder.

Delete

: Delete the conversations. Deleted conversations are moved to the Trash folder.

Change labels

: Relocate the conversations to the Inbox, Personal, Receipts, Travel, or Work folder and then touch OK.

Mark as Read

/ Mark as Unread

: Mark the conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is marked as read, it has a gray background. Touch DONE to remove the check marks. Tip: To move a conversation to another folder, touch and drag it to the folder tab. Messaging 77 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. Touch Menu for these options:

Add star / Remove star: Mark (or unmark) conversations with a yellow star. Starred conversations are listed in the Starred folder. Touch DONE to remove check marks.

Mark important / Mark not important: Change the

. Yellow indicates important. importance indicator

Mute: New messages added to muted conversations bypass your inbox so that the conversation stays archived in the All Mail folder.

Report spam: Report the conversations as spam, which is email that violates the Gmail Program Policies and/or Terms of Use.

Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to Gmail Account Settings on page 79.

Help: Learn about using Gmail.

Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form. Composing and Sending Gmail 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Compose. Apps Gmail. 78 3. Touch the To field to enter recipients. As you enter names or email addresses, matching contacts display. Touch a contact to add it to the field. 4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject. 5. Touch Compose email to enter the text of your email. 6. While composing a message, the following options are displayed:

+ CC/BCC: Create Cc (copy) and Bcc (blind copy) fields in the message. After creating the fields, touch to enter recipients. Attach: Launch Gallery to select a photo to add to the

message. 7. Touch Menu for the following options:

Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to Gmail Account Settings on page 79.

Help: Learn about using Gmail.

Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form. 8. Touch SEND to send this message. or Touch message. Menu Save draft to save a draft of this DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Gmail Account Settings 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Apps Menu Settings for settings:

Gmail. General settings

Confirm before deleting: Have your device prompt you to confirm Delete actions.

Confirm before archiving: Have your device prompt you to confirm archiving actions.

Confirm before sending: Have your device prompt you to confirm Send actions.

Auto-advance: Choose a screen to show after you delete or archive a conversation.

Message text size: Set the size of text in message displays.

Clear search history: Remove previous searches you performed.

Hide pictures in messages: Stops pictures from displaying automatically in messages until you allow it for a sender.

(Gmail account settings) Each account has independent settings:

Priority Inbox: This setting is only available if you have configured Gmail on the web to show Priority Inbox. If available, you can set Priority Inbox as the conversation list to open when you have new mail, rather than Inbox.

Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email appear in the Status Bar.

Ringtone & vibrate: If Email notifications is enabled, touch this field to set the following options:

Sync messages: Sync options are: None, Last 30 days, or All. Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email appear in the Status Bar. Ringtone: Choose a ringtone for new email notifications or use the default ringtone and then touch OK. Notify once: When enabled, a notification appears in the Status Bar for new email, not for every new message.

Signature: Create a text signature to add to outgoing messages.

Gmail sync is ON/OFF: Indicates whether you have Gmail synchronization turned on for this account in the Account and sync settings. Touch to open those settings. Messaging 79 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Open Talk and Sign In 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Talk. If you are not signed in to a Google account, the Add a Google Account screen displays. 2. Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account, or New to create a Google account. For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76. Note: If you have already set up your Google account, you are automatically logged in. Just touch the account. Once sign in is complete, the Talk main screen displays.

Days of mail to sync: Set the number days to sync email for this Gmail account.

Manage labels: Choose which labels are synchronized.

Download attachments: Enable or disable auto-download of files attached to recent messages when connected through Wi-Fi. About Gmail

Displays information about the Gmail (Version, copyright information, Send feedback, Report a problem, Open source licenses, Privacy Policy). Google Talk Talk is Googles instant messaging and audio and video chat service. You can use it to communicate, in real time, with other people who also use Google Talk on another Android tablet or phone or on a computer. Tip: Talk requires that you have a Google account. To set up your Google account on your device use Accounts and sync settings. (For more information, refer to Accounts on page 198.) 80 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Invite a Friend to Chat You can invite anyone with a Google Account to become your friend in Google Talk, so you can chat with each other and view each others online status. 1. While viewing your Friends list, touch 2. Enter your friends address and touch DONE. Add friend. Your friends address in Talk is a Gmail or other email address that is configured to connect to Google Talk. If your friend accepts your invitation, they are added to your Friends list in Talk and you can share each others status in Talk and other applications. View and Accept an Invitation to Become a Friend When a contact invites you to become a friend in Google Talk, you receive a invitation displays in your Friends list. notification in the System Bar and the 1. Touch the invitation. 2. Touch Accept, if you want to accept the invitation and chat, Decline, if you do not want to chat with and share your Google Talk status with the sender right now, or Block, if you do not want to receive any more invitations from that person. If you touch Accept, the friend is added to your Friends list in Talk and you can share your status in Talk and other applications. Talk Options There are several options that are available while viewing your Friends list and some that are only available while you are chatting. 1. Touch to search your Talk messages or the current message for a word. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a search term. Touch on the keyboard to search your Talk messages. 2. Touch to invite another friend to chat, to invite a friend to video chat, or voice chat. to invite a friend to Messaging 81 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Note: If you touch the REMOVE option, touch Add friend Send chat invitation to, to make the Friend visible again.

Add to chat: Choose another friend to invite to this conversation.

Clear chat history: Remove the history of this chat from your device.

Settings: Offers various settings for Google talk. For more information, refer to Google Talk Settings on page 82.

Help: Displays additional help information.

Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form. Google Talk Settings Use Google Talk Settings to configure your Talk account. If you have more than one account, each maintains its own Talk settings. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Talk. 3. Touch a Friends entry to display the Chat entries for that Friend. 4. Touch Menu to display the following options, which are available while viewing your Friends list and some that are only available while you are chatting.

Display options: To set the way your friends list is sorted, touch Availability, Name, or Recency.

End all chats: End all chats in which you are engaged.

Sign out: Sign out of Google Talk and display the Talk main screen.

End chat: End this chat session.

Go off the record/Stop chatting off the record: Set whether you want to stop saving your chat to the chat history.

Friend info: Display information about the friend with which you are chatting. The following options are also displayed:

BLOCK: Keeps this person from sending you messages and removes the person from your Friends list. REMOVE: Remove the friend as if you never accepted their invitation. However, the friend is not blocked. 82 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Menu Settings, then touch an account for 2. Touch options:

GENERAL

Mobile indicator: Check and your friends see an outline of an android next to your name in their Friends list when you are signed into Google Talk on a tablet or phone.

Away when screen off: Check to change your Talk status to Away when your screen turns off. When unchecked, your status is not changed.

Invitation notifications: Show notification when a friend invitation arrives. CHAT NOTIFICATIONS

IM notifications: Set whether to open a dialog, display a notification in the System Bar, or neither, when you receive a text chat.

Notification ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when you receive a text chat. VOICE & VIDEO CHAT

Video chat notifications: Set whether to open a dialog or display a notification in the System Bar when you are invited to a video chat.

Video chat ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when you receive an invitation to a video chat.

Default video effect: Set the video image stabilization. ACCOUNT

Blocked friends: Displays a list of friends you have blocked. Touch a blocked friend and then touch OK to unblock the friend.

Clear search history: Erases your search history. No previous searches are shown until you search for new words.

Manage account: Opens the Accounts and sync settings. (For more information, refer to Accounts on page 198.) ABOUT

Terms & privacy: Displays the Google Talk terms of use and privacy policies. Messaging 83 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Google+

Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+. 1. Sign in to your Google account. For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76. 2. From a Home screen, touch Apps Google+. 3. Select the account to use to sign in to Google+. or Touch Add account to create another account. The Enrich your contacts screen displays. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+. 5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information. 84 Messenger With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation, putting everyone on the same page. When you get a new conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your tablet. To get started, touch the Messenger icon on the home screen of the Google+ app or use the Messenger icon on your Applications screen. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Messenger. The Messenger screen displays. 2. Sign in to your Google account if you are not already signed in. For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76. 3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+. or Touch Add account to create another account. The Enrich your contacts screen displays. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Messenger. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Note: Uploading over a mobile network uses a data connection and charges may apply. 5. Touch Menu Help and then touch a topic to learn more about using Google Messenger. Messaging 85 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 6: Multimedia This section describes the various multimedia applications available on your device such as Media Hub, Music Player, Google Play Music, Video Player, Play Movies & TV, Gallery, Camera, Camcorder, and Photo Editor. For more information, refer to Applications and Widgets on page 134. Media Hub Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your finger tips, entertaining on the go has never been easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and conveniently watch anywhere. Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you have never experienced it before. Note: Media Hub service requires a Samsung account and depends on service availability. 86 1. From the Apps screen, touch 2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA), touch Media Hub. I agree to the Terms and Conditions, and then touch Accept to continue or Decline to exit. The Media Hub screen displays. 3. To rent or buy media, you must have a Samsung Menu account. Touch your Samsung account or to create an account. Follow the prompts to complete log-in. My Profile to sign in to 4. Browse content using these options:

Whats new: Recently-added titles for rent or purchase.

Movies: Movies you can rent or purchase.

TV Shows: TV shows you can rent or purchase.

My Media: Content you have previously purchased or rented. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 5. When you find media you want to view, use these

You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you options:

View trailer: View a short clip from the movie or show.

Buy: Purchase the media for unlimited viewing on your device. Follow the prompts to enter payment details. have acquired through the Service.

You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content.

Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be

Rent: Purchase a time-limited download of the media. Follow viewable on only 1 device in your account. the prompts to enter payment details. 6. For additional information about Media Hub, touch Menu Help. Media Hub Notices

Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you create an account in Media Hub.

Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same account.

You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than once every 90 days.

You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download availability and studio permissions.

Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.

Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks where there is a weak signal.

You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a) license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media Content has been buffered.

You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive hours of start of playback. Stopping, pausing, or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time. Multimedia 87 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four

(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).

You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub through any output on your mobile device, including All Share. Game Hub Samsung Game Hub is a premium game service that lets you play, connect and share games. Game Hub comes pre-

packed with popular social games and with a variety of premium HD games that have been optimized for your Samsung device with its blazing fast Quad Core processor and SUPER AMOLED Plus screens. Note: Game Hub service requires a Samsung account and depends on service availability. 1. From the Apps screen, touch Game Hub. A Disclaimer screen appears. 2. Read the Game Hub disclaimer text and press Confirm. The Game Hub screen appears showing the following games menus: Social Games, and Premium Games, and Installed games. 3. For more information, touch More games in either the Social Games (launches Samsung Apps) or the Premium Games (launches the More games pop-up) menu. 88 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. Follow the prompts to select a game to download. For each game you select, a Details screen appears. The following options are available:

Search:

Account information:

Game categories:

Menu:

Settings:

Terms and conditions:

Download:

Launch:

Share: You can choose to share games over Facebook or Twitter. 5. To begin downloading the game, touch Download. After downloading completes, the game should be installed automatically. 6. To begin playing the game:

Touch Launch. or

Touch Back, then touch the new games icon in the Installed games menu. Music Player Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. The Music Player application searches your devices internal storage for music and playlists. This can take from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on the amount of new music added since you last opened the application. It then displays your music in several ways. 2. Touch Songs, Playlists, Albums, Artists, Genres, Folders, Composers, Years, or Music square to change the way you view the contents of your library. 3. Touch the Music application icon at the top-left of the Application bar to return to the previous Music screen. Managing Your Music Searching for Music To find music in your library:

Multimedia 89 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Creating a Playlist Music Player. 2. Touch 3. Type the name of an artist, album, or song. Search. Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box. 4. Touch a matching song to play it. Touch a matching album, or artist to view a list of its songs. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player Playlists. New playlist. 2. Touch 3. Touch the name field to enter a name for the playlist. 4. Touch OK to save the new playlist. Renaming a Playlist 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. 2. Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch Menu Rename playlist. 3. Touch the name field to enter a new name for the playlist. 4. Touch OK to save the new playlist. Adding Songs to Playlists 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. 90 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY and touch a playlist. 2. Touch or Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch Changing the Order of a Playlist 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. Add music. All songs are displayed. 3. Touch next to each song you want to add or next to Add all to add all songs to the playlist. The songs appear under the playlist to the right of the songs list. 4. Touch Done to save the playlist. Removing Songs from Playlists 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. 2. Touch and touch a playlist. All songs are displayed to the left of the playlist and the songs in the playlist are displayed on the right, under the playlist name. 3. Touch 4. Touch Done to save the playlist. to remove a song from the playlist. 2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist. 3. Touch Reorder to change the order of the songs. Touch the grid new position in the list. on an entry and drag the entry to a 4. Touch Done to change the order and save the playlist. Playing a Playlist 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. 2. Display the Playlists library view. 3. Touch Favorites, Most played, or Recently added, or touch a playlist title that you created. 4. Touch a song to start playing the playlist at that song. Deleting a Playlist 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. 2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist. 3. Touch Delete in the Application bar. Multimedia 91 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. Touch the box next to a playlist title. A check mark

Settings: The following settings display:

indicates the playlist is to be deleted. 5. Touch Remove and then touch OK to delete the selected Advanced Sound settings: Choose SoundAlive and Play speed playlist. Changing Music Settings To change settings in the Music application:

Apps 1. From a Home screen, touch Music Player. 2. Touch Menu to display the following options:

Delete: Touch the box for any song or album you want to delete or touch the box for Select all to select every song or album. A check mark indicates the song or album is to be deleted. Touch Delete to delete the selected items.

Share via: Share your music by using Group Cast, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Gmail, or Email. Select the songs you want to share and touch Share.

Set as alarm tone: Choose a song and touch Set to use the song as an alarm tone.

Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to nearby devices. settings. Lyrics: Display the lyrics of the song, if available. Music auto off: Set the option Off or set your music to turn off automatically after 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 1 hour and 30 minutes, or 2 hours. Music menu Music menu: Enable or disable the music display options that next to appear on the main music screen. A check mark an option means that it is enabled. Listening to Music You can listen to music by using your devices built-in speakers, through a wired headset or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo headset. For more information, refer to Bluetooth on page 122. Touch the Volume Key on the side of the device to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press the Volume Key to adjust playback volume. 92 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Playing Music To play a song:

1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. 2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it. or While viewing a list of albums or genres, touch the album thumbnail and then touch a song in the list of songs on the album. The song you touch starts to play. The tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list (unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops only if you stop it, even when you switch applications. Accessing the Music Player If you navigate away from the Music Player application and music is playing, you can change songs or easily return to the Music Player:

1. Touch the Music notification icon in the System 2. Bar. In the Status Details, touch the song title to display the Music Player. You can also pause and resume playback and skip to the next or previous song in the panel. For more information, refer to Notifications on page 35. Using the Music Player Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player. 2. Touch a song or playlist to begin playback. The music player displays below (portrait mode) or to the right (landscape mode) of the music listing. Multimedia 93 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. Touch the music player to enlarge it and touch the screen to display the sound and playlist controls. 4. During playback, use the sound and playlist controls:

to mark the current song as a

Favorite: Touch the star Favorite Volume Artist /

Album SoundAlive Song Title List Mode Info Shuffle Progress Bar Playback Controls Time Indicators Repeat 94 favorite.

Volume: Touch to toggle Silent mode and Sound mode, then touch and drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press the Volume Key on the side of the device to adjust playback volume.

SoundAlive: Touch to view and set SoundAlive options.

Info: Touch to view information about the current song.

List Mode: Touch to switch to the list of songs.

Shuffle: When enabled, songs play in random order. When disabled, songs play in the order they appear in List view.

Progress Bar: Touch and drag the end of the progress bar to scan forward or backward through the current song.

Playback Controls: These buttons control the playback of songs:

Touch to advance to the next song. Touch and hold to scan forward through the current song. Touch to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold to scan backward through the current song. Touch to pause playback. Touch to resume playback. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Repeat: Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or disable repeat mode. Options While Playing a Song There are various options and controls available while a song is playing:

1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Music Player, touch a song or an album, and then a song. 2. Touch the music player to enlarge it. 3. Touch Menu to display the following options:

Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing playlist.

Via Bluetooth: Play the current song by using a Bluetooth device.

Share via: Share the current song by using Group Cast, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Gmail, or Email.

Set as alarm tone: Use the current song as an alarm tone.

Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to nearby devices.

Settings: Displays Music Player settings. For more information, refer to Changing Music Settings on page 92. Video Player Your devices 10.1-inch 1280x800 WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD screen provides playback of videos. Use Video Player to view and manage videos stored on your tablet. Tip: Video Player displays by default as a Primary shortcut on a Home screen. 1. From a Home screen, touch Video Player. or From a Home screen, touch Apps Video Player. 2. Touch the Thumbnails, List, or Folders tab. 3. Touch Search and use the keyboard to enter a search term. The current folder is searched and results are displayed. Touch X to remove the search field. Menu for options:

4. While viewing the list, touch

List by: Display videos by Name (default), Date, Size, or Type.

Share via: Share the video with Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube, Gmail, or Email. Multimedia 95 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

Delete: Touch videos to select them for deletion or touch Select all to delete all videos. Touch Delete to deleted the selected videos.

Full-Screen View (

): Changes the display mode to full screen. That is, the entire screen is used, which may cause some minor distortion.

Auto play next: Touch to enable or disable automatic playing of 7. Touch SoundAlive to set the sound quality to videos in the order they appear. Normal, Voice, Movie, or Virtual 7.1 ch.

Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to 8. While the video is playing, touch Bookmark to mark your favorite areas of the video. A yellow mark displays on the progress bar. nearby devices. 5. Touch a video to play it. While playing a video, touch the screen to display or hide on-screen playback controls. 6. Touch the icon in the upper left corner of the display screen while the video is playing to change the Display Mode from original size to full screen in ratio or full screen.

Original Size (

): Changes the display mode to the original size.

Full-Screen in Ratio View (

): Changes the display mode to the full-screen in ratio option. The video is enlarged as much as possible without becoming distorted. 96 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 9. During playback, press Menu for options:

Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to

Share via: Send the video by Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, nearby devices. YouTube, Gmail, or Email.

Chapter preview: If chapter information is recorded in the video file, display the chapters. Touch a chapter to begin playing the video at that point.

Trim: Trim the original video or trim the video and create a new video.

Via Bluetooth: Turn Bluetooth on to use Bluetooth services.

Video Maker: Open this video in the Video Maker app. For more information, refer to Video Editor on page 161.

Bookmarks: If bookmarks have been set for this video, a thumbnail and time are displayed for each bookmark. Touch to remove a bookmark.

Details: Provides details about the video, such as Name, Size, Resolution, Duration, Format, and Date modified.

Time set for auto video off: Automatically turn off the video. Options are: Off, After playing, After 15 min, After 30 min, After 1 hour, After 1 hour 30 min, or After 2 hours.

Settings: Touch this option to view the following:

Play speed: Touch and drag the slider to decrease or increase play speed. Subtitles: View subtitles for the video, if available. Auto play next: Enable or disable auto play of the next video. For more information, refer to Playing Videos on page 101. Play Movies & TV The Play Movies & TV app is available for select Android devices. Any movie you rent from the Google Play Store can be downloaded for offline viewing through this application. In addition, the Play Movies & TV app can be used to stream your Google Play movie rentals as well as play any of your personal videos stored on your tablet. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Play Movies & TV. 2. For more information touch Menu Help. Multimedia 97 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Gallery Your devices 10.1-inch 1280x800 WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD screen provides a high-resolution display of photos and videos. Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos. Selecting Photos and Videos to View Gallery. 1. From a Home screen, touch or From a Home screen, touch All albums display. Apps Gallery. 2. Touch Albums to display other ways to group your photos and videos. Options are:

Albums: Based on the folder in which they are stored.

Locations: Based on where taken.

Time: Based on the time taken. 3. Touch Camera to launch the Camera app. 4. Touch Menu to display the following options:

Select album / Select group: Touch one or more albums or groups that you want to share, stream to another device, or delete.

Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to nearby devices. Viewing Groups of Photos and Videos 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a category and then a group to view it. Gallery. Thumbnails for each photo and video in the group display. 3. Touch Slideshow to view a slideshow of the available pictures and videos. 4. Touch Menu for these options:

Select item: Touch one or more items that you want to share, stream to another device, or delete.

Group by: Further group this group by Location, Time, Person, or Group, depending on the way you chose the group. 98 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Viewing Photos and Videos 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then Gallery. touch a photo or video thumbnail. 3. Touch the screen to show or hide Gallery options. 4. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more information, refer to Pinch on page 34. 5. Sweep across the screen to display the next or previous photo or video. (Videos are indicated by the Play button.) The current photo or video is outlined in the thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a thumbnail to view the photo or video it represents. 6. Touch Share to use Group Cast (photos), Picasa

(photos), Photo editor (photos), Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube (videos), Gmail, or Email to share the photo or video. 7. Touch Slideshow to view a slideshow of photos and video thumbnails in the group. Touch the screen to stop the slideshow and view the photo or video being displayed. 8. To delete the photo or video being displayed, touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the item or Cancel to exit. Menu to display the following options for 9. Touch photos:

Copy to clipboard: Copy the current photo to the clipboard.

Rotate left: Allows you to rotate the photo counterclockwise 90 degrees.

Rotate right: Allows you to rotate the photo clockwise 90 degrees.

Crop: Allows you to crop the image. Touch and drag the crop box or the sides or corners of the crop box to create the crop area, then touch Done. Touch X to stop without cropping the photo.

Edit: Use Photo studio or Video Maker to edit your photo or video. Multimedia 99 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Set as: Assign the photo as a Contact photo, Home screen, Lock Screen, or Home and lock screens.

Print: Print the current photo to a Samsung printer.

Show on map: This option displays if a Location exists for the photo. A Location is added to the photo if GPS tag is set On in the Camera settings. Touch this option to open the Map app and display the Location where the photo was taken. For more information, refer to Camera Settings on page 103. There is only two options for videos that are not playing:

Rename: Enter an new file name.

Details: Provides details about the video such as Title, Time, Duration, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close to close the pop-up. For menu options while a video is playing and other video options, see Video Player on page 95. Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a photo when posting your photos on the Internet.

Rename: Enter an new file name.

Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to nearby devices.

Details: Provides details about the photo such as Title, Time, Location, Width, Height, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close to close the pop-up. Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera folder as jpg files. For more information, refer to My Files on page 153. Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera folder as mp4 files. For more information, refer to My Files on page 153. 10. Press Back to return to the category screen. Setting a Picture As You can use the photos you take as a contacts photo or as wallpaper for the Home or Lock screen:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then Gallery. touch a photo to select it. Menu Set as. 3. Touch 100 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. Touch Contact photo and then touch a contact entry. or Touch Home and lock screens, Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper. The Crop picture screen displays. 5. Touch and drag the crop box or the sides or corners of the crop box to create the crop area, then touch Done to save the cropped photo as the contacts icon or wallpaper. Touch Cancel to stop without cropping the photo. Tip: To remove a contact photo, see Updating Contacts on page 59. Tip: To change wallpaper, see Wallpapers on page 43. Playing Videos 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then Gallery. touch a video thumbnail to play the video. Note: Videos are marked with a Play button. 3. Touch 4. Touch 5. Touch and drag the Pause to pause the video. Resume to resume playing the video. white dot on the progress bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the right end of the progress bar to end the video playback. or Touch Rewind to restart the video or Fast Forward to end the video. For more information, refer to Video Player on page 95. Multimedia 101 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 1. From the Home screen, touch Camera. or From a Home screen, touch Apps Camera. If a memory card is inserted, the Storage setting pop-up displays. 2. Touch OK to change the storage setting to memory card. or Touch Cancel to use the device storage for storing pictures and videos. Note: If memory card storage is used, photos are stored in the

/Root/extSdCard/DCIM/Camera folder as jpg files. For more information, refer to My Files on page 153. Sharing Photos and Videos Share photos and videos with your friends. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch a category and then a group to display Gallery. thumbnails. 3. Touch 4. Touch one or more photos and videos to highlight them Menu Select item. for sharing. 5. Touch 6. Touch Group Cast (photos only), Picasa (photos only), Share. Photo editor (photos only), Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube (videos only), Gmail, or Email, then follow the prompts. Camera Use your devices built-in camera and camcorder to take photos and record videos. Tip: Camera displays by default as a Primary shortcut on the Home screen. 102 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY The Camera screen displays. Settings Shortcuts GPS Active Storage Indicator Mode Camera Image Viewer Settings Taking Photos To take a photo:

1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your Camera. picture by aiming the lens at the subject. To configure settings, see Camera Settings on page 103. 3. To take the photo, touch the Camera button. 4. Touch Back to leave the Camera and display the previous screen. Important! Do not take photos of people without their permission. Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed. Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another persons privacy. Camera Settings Before you start taking photos, use the camera settings to configure the camera for best results. Camera settings are represented by icons on the left side of the screen. Editing Camera Settings Shortcuts The first five icons are actually shortcuts to camera settings. These five shortcuts can be customized to fit your preference. Self-portrait, Effects, and Shooting mode, Exposure value are default settings Timer, shortcuts. Multimedia 103 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Shooting mode: Choose an automatic shooting mode, from:

Single shot: Take a single photo. Smile shot: Touch the Camera button to automatically focus on the subjects face and take the photo. Panorama: Touch the Camera button to take a photo, then use the on-screen guideline to move the viewfinder and take the next 7 shots automatically.

Scene mode: Choose an automatic scene mode from None, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow, Sunset, Dawn, Fall Color, Firework, Candlelight, or Backlight.

Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from

-2.0 to +2.0.

Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before taking a photo. Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.

Effects: Apply an effect to photos. Options are: No effect, Negative, Black and white, or Sepia. To customize these shortcuts:

Settings Edit shortcuts. 1. Touch or Touch and hold any of the shortcut icons to edit them. 2. Touch and hold a setting, then drag and drop it on one of the five settings shortcuts to the left. The replaced setting shortcut displays in the edit list. Configuring Camera Settings To configure Camera settings:

While in Camera mode, touch a settings shortcut or Settings to configure the following camera touch settings:

Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more information, refer to Editing Camera Settings Shortcuts on page 103.

Self-portrait: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera lens and take a photo of yourself. 104 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Resolution: Set a size for the image. Options are: 3.2M

(2048x1536), w2.4M (2048x1152), 2M (1600X1200), w1.3M (1536x864), 1.3M (1280x960), w0.9M (1280x720), or 0.3M (640x480).

White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent. Viewing Photos with the Image Viewer After taking a photo, use the Image Viewer to view, share, delete, or edit photos. 1. Touch Image Viewer to view the photo. 2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer options.

Metering: Set how the camera measures or meters the light 3. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the source: Center-weighted, Spot, or Matrix.

Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in photo composition.

GPS tag: Enable or disable tagging of photos with your GPS location. displays on the screen when this option is active. Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a photo when posting your photos on the Internet.

Shutter sound: Enable or disable a shutter sound when you take a photo. Options are: Off or On.

Storage: Set whether to store photos on your device or on your memory card.

Reset: Reset all Camera settings to the defaults. Touch OK. screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more information, refer to Pinch on page 34. 4. Sweep across the screen to display the next or previous photo. The current photo is outlined in the thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a thumbnail to view the photo it represents. 5. Touch Share to use Group Cast, Picasa, Photo editor, Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Gmail, or Email to share the photo. 6. Touch Slideshow to display a slide show of the available pictures and videos. 7. To delete the photo being displayed, touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the photo or Cancel to exit. Multimedia 105 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 8. Touch Menu to select Set picture as to assign the photo as a Contact photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper. For more information, refer to Viewing Photos and Videos on page 99. Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera folder as jpg files. For more information, refer to My Files on page 153. 9. Press photos. Back to return to the Camera to take more Camcorder Use your devices built-in Camcorder to record high-

definition video in 1080p resolution. 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Slide the Mode button to the Camera. Camcorder setting. The Camcorder screen displays. 106 Settings Shortcuts Current or Elapsed Time Storage Indicator Mode Record Image Viewer Settings Recording Videos File Size Available Storage 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Slide the Mode button to the Camera. Camcorder setting. 3. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your shot by aiming the lens at the subject. To configure settings, see Camcorder Settings on page 107. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. To start recording, touch Record. During recording, a white square appears on the Record button. 5. Touch 6. Touch Record to stop recording. Back to leave the Camcorder and display the previous screen. Important! Do not take videos of people without their permission. Do not take videos in places where cameras are not allowed. Do not take videos in places where you may interfere with another persons privacy. Camcorder Settings Before you start taking videos, use the camcorder settings to configure the camcorder for best results. Camcorder settings are represented by icons on the left side of the screen. Editing Camcorder Settings Shortcuts As with the camera, the first five icons are actually shortcuts to camcorder settings. These five shortcuts can be customized to fit your preference. Self-recording, Effects, and Recording mode, Timer, Exposure value are default settings shortcuts. To customize these shortcuts, see Editing Camera Settings Shortcuts on page 103. Configuring Camcorder Settings To configure Camcorder settings:

While in Camcorder mode, touch a settings shortcut or Settings to configure the following touch Camcorder settings:

Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more information, refer to Editing Camera Settings Shortcuts on page 103.

Self-recording: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera lens and record a video of yourself. Multimedia 107 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Recording mode: Set a recording mode. Options are: Normal and Limit for email, which limits the size of the video to 50 megabytes.

Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from

-2.0 to +2.0. Viewing Videos with the Image Viewer After recording a video, use the Image Viewer to play, share, or delete your video. 1. Touch Image Viewer to view the video. 2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer

Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before recording a options. video. Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.

Effects: Apply an effect to videos. Options are: No effect, Negative, Black and white, or Sepia.

Resolution: Set a size for the video. Options are: 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, or 320x240.

White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent. 3. Sweep across the screen to display the next or previous video. The current video is outlined in the thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a thumbnail to view the video it represents. 4. Touch Share to use Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube, Gmail, or Email to share the video. Slideshow to display a slide show of the 5. Touch

Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in video available pictures and videos. composition.

Storage: Set whether to store you videos on your device or on your memory card.

Reset: Reset all Camera settings to the defaults. Touch OK. 6. To delete the video being displayed, touch Delete and then touch Delete to delete the video or Cancel to exit. 108 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera folder as mp4 files. For more information, refer to My Files on page 153. 7. To play a video, touch Play. Touch Pause to pause the video and touch playing the video. Resume to resume 8. Touch and drag the white dot on the progress bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the right end of the progress bar to end the video playback. or Touch Rewind to restart the video or Fast Forward to end the video. 9. Touch SoundAlive to set the sound quality to Normal, Voice, Movie, or Virtual 7.1 ch. 10. Press Back to return to the Camcorder. For more information, refer to Video Player on page 95. Photo Editor The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions for photos that you take on your device. Along with basic image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color, it also provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the photo. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Photo editor. 2. Touch Select picture to edit a photo in your Gallery. or Touch Take picture to take a photo with the camera. 3. Touch the photo to load it into the Photo editor. 4. Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your photo:

Selection: Touch the selection icon and then touch Magnetic, Lasso, Brush, Round, or Square to set how to mark an area for cropping, rotating, and so on. Touch single area, to add to a selected area, or to select a to remove part of a selected area. Selection Size: Set the size of the Grab selection area. Drag the slider from small to large. Multimedia 109 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 5. When all updates to the photo have been made, touch Save. Use the keyboard to name the edited photo and touch OK to save it. 6. While editing a photo, touch Menu to display the following options:

Select picture: Open a new photo for editing.

Take picture: Open the Camera and take a new photo.

Share via: Send photos to another device or another person. Options are: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Group Cast, Picasa, or Wi-Fi Direct.

Set as: Use this photo as a Contact photo, a Home and lock screens, Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper image. Inverse: Select the entire picture except for the selected area. Undo: Remove the last change. Redo: Restore a removed change. Rotate: Rotate a photo to the left or to the right or create a mirror image of the photo. Resize: Touch and then drag the corners of the photo to resize it. Crop: Touch to crop (cut-out) an area of a photo. Color: Set the Auto adjustment, Exposure, Saturation, Contrast, Brightness, and Hue of a photo. You can also make it Grey-scale or add a Temperature effect. Effects: Add various effects to your photo, such as Blur, Motion, Distortion, Filter, or Frames. Tools: Copy and Paste to another image or to the original image. You can use the Spot healing option. 110 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Games Real Racing 2 Real Racing 2 is a high definition, 3D racer that has you racing as a Rookie on a racing circuit. Tip: A shortcut to Real Racing 2 displays on a Home screen by default. 1. From a Home screen, touch Real Racing 2. or From a Home screen, touch Real Racing 2. Apps 2. The first time you access this game touch DOWNLOAD to download the game and play. 3. Enjoy the game!

Multimedia 111 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 7: Connections This section describes the various connections your device can make including accessing the Internet with your Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting to your PC. Internet The Internet browser is your access to the mobile web. This section explains how to navigate Internet and introduces you to the basic features. Accessing the Web Your device is equipped with a full HTML Browser that allows you to access the Internet. Tip: By default, an Internet shortcut appears on the Home screen. From the Home screen, touch Internet. or From a Home screen panel, touch Internet. The Most visited screen displays. Apps 112 Navigating the Internet The following options are available for Internet navigation. Command Keys

Touch

Touch and hold Back to display browser History. For more information, refer to Accessing Bookmarks and History on page 115. to return to the previous page. Back or DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Forward to go forward to a recent page. Refresh to reload the current page.

Touch

Touch Touching and Dragging

Touch and drag your finger on the screen to navigate pages and to reposition pages within the screen. Entering Text in a Field

While browsing, touch a text field to display the virtual QWERTY keyboard to enter text. Zoom

Tap the screen twice to zoom in or out.

Use two fingers, such as your index finger and thumb, to zoom out by making an inward pinch motion on the screen. To zoom in, make an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out. Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to landscape mode. Selecting Items On a Page While browsing, use gestures and menus to navigate:

Touch an item to select it.

Touch a hyperlink to follow the link.

Touch and hold on a hyperlink for these options:

Open: Open the linked page. Open in new tab: Open a new window to display the linked page. Save link: Save the linked page to Download history. Copy link URL: Save the links URL to the clipboard. Select text: Copy the link text to the clipboard.

Touch and hold an image for the additional options:

Save image: Download an image. View downloaded images in Gallery. Copy image: Copy an image to the clipboard. View image: View the image source. Set as wallpaper: Use the image as your home screen wallpaper. Connections 113 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Using Browser Windows You can have multiple windows open at one time and easily switch between windows. 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. To open a new window, touch Internet. at the top of the screen. 3. To switch to another open window, touch its tab at the top of the screen. 4. To delete an open window, touch the tab at the top of the screen, and then touch

. Entering a URL Access a website quickly by entering the URL. 1. From the Home screen, touch Internet. 2. Touch the URL field at the top of the screen, then enter the URL using the virtual QWERTY keyboard. As you enter characters, potential matches display. Note: Use the Delete key to clear the URL field, if necessary. 114 3. Touch a match to complete the URL. or Continue entering characters and touch the Go key to load the page. Copying Fields or Text Copy information from a webpage to the clipboard for pasting, searching, or sharing. Selecting, Copying, and Pasting Text 1. From the Home screen, touch Internet. 2. Browse to a webpage. 3. On the webpage, touch and hold on the text until you see the text you want highlighted, then stop touching the screen. The text is highlighted. 4. Touch and drag the select more or less text. tabs to the left or right to 5. Touch Copy at the top of the screen to copy the selected text or touch Done to stop. 6. To paste the copied text, navigate to the desired field

(or to another application), then touch and hold in a text field and touch Paste in the pop-up. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

 

 

Copying and Pasting a Hyperlink or URL 1. From the Home screen, touch Internet. 2. Browse to a webpage. 3. Touch and hold on the link or URL, then touch Copy link URL on the pop-up menu. 4. To paste the copied link or URL, navigate to the desired field (or to another application), then touch and hold in a text field and touch Paste on the pop-up menu. Using Bookmarks While browsing, bookmark a site to quickly access it later. Creating a bookmark Accessing Bookmarks and History Launch a bookmarked page or reload recent pages. 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. On the Bookmarks tab, use these options:

Bookmarks, History, and Saved pages. Internet.

Touch a bookmark to load the page.

Touch and hold on a bookmark for these options:

Open: Open the bookmarked page. Open in new tab: Open the linked page in a new window. Edit bookmark: Make changes to the bookmark description. Add shortcut to home screen: Create a bookmark on the Internet. Home screen. 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Browse to a website, then touch Add bookmark. The Add bookmark options list displays. Confirm the Name and URL Address for the bookmark. In the Folder field, touch the drop-down menu, and touch Homescreen, Bookmarks, or Other folder. 3. 4. Touch OK to save the bookmark. A gold star displays on the Bookmarked page. Share link: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, or Wi-Fi Direct to send the link. Copy link URL: Save the links URL to the clipboard. Delete bookmark: Remove the bookmark. Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home page. Connections 115 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. On the History tab, touch Today, Yesterday, Last 7 days, Last month, Older, or Most visited to use these options:

Touch a page to reload it.

Touch the next to a page to bookmark it. Touch a gold star next to a page to remove the bookmark.

Touch and hold on a page for these options:

Open: Open the webpage. Open in new tab: Launch the webpage in a new window. Add bookmark/Remove from Bookmarks: Bookmark the page or remove the bookmark for this page. Share link: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, or Wi-Fi Direct to send the link. Copy link URL: Save the links URL to the clipboard. Remove from history: Remove the record of this page. Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home page. 5. On the Saved pages tab, use these options:

Touch a page to reload it.

Touch and hold on a page and then touch Remove from saved pages to remove the page from Saved pages. Browser Menu While viewing a webpage, touch options:

Home: Display the Home page.

New tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a new tab.

New incognito tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a Menu for the following new tab, and the pages you view in the new window will not appear in your browser history or search history. See the on-

screen explanation of going incognito.

Add shortcut to home screen: Add the URL for this webpage as a shortcut on the first home screen.

Share page: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, or Wi-Fi Direct to send the webpage URL.

Find on page: Search for content on the current page.

Desktop view: Your browser displays a website in a modified format that makes it easier to read. Desktop view displays a website the same way it would appear on a PC.

Save for offline reading: Saves the webpage so you can read it later even when offline.

Downloads: View and manage recent downloads. 116 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Print: Print the current screen or page to a Samsung printer.

Settings: Configure web settings. For more information, refer to Browser Settings on page 117. Browser Settings Use the browser settings to customize the browser. Internet. Menu 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. While viewing a webpage, touch Settings. Customize the Browser by using the following options:

General

Set home page: View and set the default first page that displays when you launch the Browser.

Form auto-fill: Enable or disable form auto-fill to complete Web forms with a single click. State: Enter your state. Postcode: Enter your ZIP code. Country: Enter your country. Phone: Enter your telephone number. Email: Enter a valid email address. Privacy and security

Clear cache: Delete content and databases stored on the device.

Clear history: Delete the list of previously-visited pages.

Show security warnings: When enabled, the Browser warns you if there is a problem with a sites security.

Accept cookies: When enabled, allows Browser to save and read cookie information used by webpages.

Auto-fill text: If Form auto-fill is enabled, set up the following

Clear all cookie data: Delete cookie information saved to the information:

Full name: Enter your name. Company name: Enter a company name. Address line 1: Enter your address. Address line 2: Enter any additional address information. City/Town: Enter your city and town. device.

Remember form data: When enabled, stores information you enter into forms to make future forms easier.

Clear form data: Deletes saved form information.

Enable location: When enabled, sites you visit can request access to your location.

Clear location access: Clear location access for all websites. Connections 117 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Remember passwords: When enabled, saves user names and passwords for sites you visit, to make future visits easier.

Clear passwords: Clear all saved user names and passwords.

Enable notifications: Set web notifications access information as Always on, On demand, or Off.

Clear notifications: Remove web notification access information. Accessibility

Force zoom: Override the website's request to control zoom.

Text size: Use the Preview field and the following controls to configure text size:

Scale text up and down: Scale the text size up or down using a slider bar. Zoom amount on double tap: Set how much to zoom when you double-tap the screen, from 175 to 225 percent. Minimum font size: Set the minimum font size, which can range from 1 point to 24 points.

Inverted screen rendering: Use the Preview screen and the following controls to configure inverted screen rendering:

Inverted rendering: Enable the display of websites with inverted colors black becomes white and vice versa. Contrast: If Inverted rendering is enabled, use this slider to set the contrast, which can range from 100 to 300 percent. Advanced

Select search engine: Choose a search engine from Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.

Open in background: When enabled, new windows open behind the current window.

Enable JavaScript: When enabled, the Browser automatically runs JavaScript scripts on pages you visit.

Enable plug-ins: When enabled, the Browser automatically loads and runs plug-ins on pages you visit.

Default storage: Select where Browser stores files.

Website settings: View and manage settings for individual websites. 118 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or Close.

Open pages in overview: When enabled, displays an overview of newly-opened pages.

Auto-fit pages: When enabled, the Browser automatically sizes webpages to fit your devices display.

Block pop-ups: When enabled, blocks pop-up windows.

Text encoding: Choose a default character set for webpages.

Reset to default: Clear all browser data and reset all settings to the factory defaults. Bandwidth management

Preload search results: Enable the browser to preload high confidence search results in the background to help speed up searches. Options are: Never, Only via Wi-Fi, or Always.

Load images: When enabled, images are automatically loaded when you visit a page. When disabled, images are indicated by a link, which you can touch to download the picture. Labs

Quick controls: When enabled, the Application and URL bars are hidden. To access the hidden controls, swipe inward from the left or right edge of the screen to access Quick Controls. For more information, refer to Browser Quick Controls on page 120.

Google Instant: When enabled, you can use Google Instant when you use Google Search to show results as you type. Enabling this option can increase data use. Connections 119 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Browser Quick Controls Use Quick Controls to maximize your viewing area while browsing the Internet. 1. From the Home screen, touch 2. While viewing a webpage, touch Internet. Menu 4. Without lifting your finger, move to an option and then lift your finger to initiate the option. 5. To cancel, display the Quick controls and touch Menu Settings Labs and touch Quick controls Settings to uncheck it. Labs, and then touch Quick Controls to enable the function. The Application and URL bars are hidden. 3. Swipe inward from the left or right edge of the screen to access quick controls. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is a wireless networking technology that provides access to local area networks. Use your devices Wi-Fi feature to:

Access the Internet for browsing or to send and receive email.

Access your corporate network.

Use hotspots provided by hotels or airports while traveling. Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing Wireless Access Point (WAP). WAPs can be Open (unsecured, as with most hotspots) or Secured (requiring you to provide login credentials). Your device supports the 802.11 b/g/n Wi-Fi protocol. Configuring Wi-Fi Settings For information about configuring your devices Wi-Fi settings, see Wi-Fi on page 169. 120 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Finding Wi-Fi Networks You can have your device automatically notify you of available networks. (For more information, refer to Wi-Fi Settings on page 169.) Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Turn your devices Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically searches for available, in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points). Turning Wi-Fi On 1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar. The Status Details displays. 2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On. Turning Wi-Fi Off 1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar. The Status Details displays. 2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi Off. Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network When you turn on Wi-Fi, your device searches for available Wi-Fi connections, then displays them on screen. 1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar. The Status Details displays. 2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On. Your device automatically scans for available Wireless Access Points. 3. When the scan is complete, touch a Wi-Fi network to connect. If the Wi-Fi network is open, your device automatically connects. If the Wi-Fi network is secured, enter the password at the prompt to connect. Adding a Wi-Fi Network Manually 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. 2. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the ON OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on. 3. Touch Add Wi-Fi network, then enter network information:

Network SSID: Enter the name of the Wi-Fi Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Security: Select the type of security used by the WAP. Connections 121 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP, additional network information may be required, such as a Password.

Password: If the WAP is secured, enter the password or hex key. 4. Touch Save to save the settings. Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications technology for exchanging information over a distance of about 30 feet. You dont need to line up the devices to send information with Bluetooth. If the devices are in range, you can exchange information between them, even if they are in different rooms. Configuring Bluetooth Settings Configure your tablets Bluetooth settings. For more information, see Bluetooth settings on page 171. Note: Bluetooth profiles are specifications for services supported by individual devices. For a list of profiles your tablet supports, see Bluetooth profiles on page 170. 122 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Turning Bluetooth On or Off Note: When Bluetooth is on, the Bluetooth icon displays in the Status Bar. To turn Bluetooth on or off:

1. From a Home screen, touch the Time display in the System Bar, in the bottom right corner of the screen. The Quick Settings and Notifications pop-up appears.

Touch

Touch or Bluetooth to turn Bluetooth On. Bluetooth to turn Bluetooth Off. 2. From a Home screen, touch Under Wireless and network:

Touch Bluetooth

Touch Bluetooth OFF ON to turn Bluetooth On. to turn Bluetooth Off. Apps Settings Connecting with a Bluetooth Device Search for a Bluetooth device, pair with it, and connect with it to exchange information between your device and the target device. Tip: After pairing, your device and the target device can recognize each other, connect, and exchange information without having to enter a passcode or PIN. 1. Turn Bluetooth on. (See Turning Bluetooth On or Off.) 2. Enable the target devices discoverable or visible mode. 3. Touch the Bluetooth tab, then touch Scan. To stop scanning at any time, touch Stop. 4. From the Available devices list, touch the target device, then follow the prompts to complete the pairing:

If the target device requires a PIN, enter a PIN for the target device and touch OK. When prompted, enter the PIN on the target device.

If the device allows automatic or smart pairing, your device attempts to pair with the device automatically. Follow the prompts on your device and the target device to complete the pairing and connection. Connections 123 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 5. Once your tablet is paired with the target device, touch Settings, beside the device name in the Paired devices list, to access the following options:

Touch Rename to change the named of the paired device.

Touch Unpair to unpair from the paired device.

Touch other options under Profiles as required. Disconnecting a Paired Device Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the device and your tablet, but retains the pairing information. At a later point, when you wish to reconnect with the device, there is no need to repeat the pairing process. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. 2. Touch the Bluetooth tab. 3. In the Paired devices list, Touch a connected device.

(The device name appears blue and bold-faced.) A Disconnect? pop-up appears. 4. Touch OK. Note: Disconnections from devices such as headsets and hands-free car kits are done manually, but disconnections and reconnections often occur automatically if the paired device is phone, tablet, or personal computer. 124 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Deleting a Paired Device (Unpair) Deleting a device from your Paired devices list removes its connection record. Once a device is unpaired, reconnection requires that you enter all the previous pairing information. 1. Turn Bluetooth on. For more information, refer to Turning Bluetooth On or Off on page 123. next to the paired device name. 2. Touch 3. Touch Unpair to unpair the paired device. Sharing Data with a Bluetooth Device To send data to a Bluetooth device:

1. Select a file or item from an appropriate application. 2. Select an option for sharing data with the Bluetooth feature. Note: The method for selecting an option may vary by data type. 3. Search for and pair with a Bluetooth device. For more information, refer to Connecting with a Bluetooth Device on page 123. Receiving Data from a Bluetooth Device To receive data from a Bluetooth device:

1. Turn Bluetooth on. For more information, refer to Turning Bluetooth On or Off on page 123. Note: To select the length of time that your device will be visible, select Menu Visible time-out. 2. Pair with the Bluetooth device from which you want to receive data. For more information, refer to Connecting with a Bluetooth Device on page 123. A Bluetooth authorization request pop-up displays when a Bluetooth device sends data to your device. 3. Select Accept to confirm that you are willing to receive data. A File received message displays. Received data is saved to the Bluetooth folder. If you receive a contact, it is saved to your contacts automatically. Connections 125 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Activating Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Activate your tablets Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot application to allow other devices to use your tablets internet connection. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. The Settings screen appears. 2. Under Wireless and network, touch More settings Tethering and portable hotspot Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot. and follow the 3. Touch Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot OFF prompts to turn Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot On. Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Use Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot to share your tablets Internet connection with a PC or other device through Wi-Fi, using your tablet as the mobile hotspot. Note: Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot requires a subscription to the applicable service to use the application. Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot consumes battery power and uses data service. While the Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot is active, your tablets applications will use the Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot data feature allowance. Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings Configure your tablets Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot settings, including your tablets name and password, and set the visibility of your tablets Wi-Fi hotspot. Tip: By default, your devices mobile hotspot has no security applied, and any device can connect. For more information about configuring your mobile hotspot, see Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot on page 175. 126 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Connecting a Device via Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Use the other devices Wi-Fi control to connect to your tablets Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot. 1. Activate Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot on your tablet. For more information, see Activating Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot on page 126. 2. Activate Wi-Fi on the other device, using that devices Wi-Fi control. 3. Scan for Wi-Fi hotspots, and select your tablet from the list. To find your tablets name, see Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot on page 176. 4. At the prompt, enter your tablets Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot password. By default, the password is your tablets telephone number. For information on changing your tablets Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot password, see Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot on page 176. Tethering Use Tethering to share your tablets internet connection with a computer connected to your device using the USB data/

charging cable.

(For more information about USB tethering, touch Help on the Tethering and portable hotspot screen.) 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. The Settings screen appears. 2. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch More settings Tethering and portable hotspot . The Tethering and portable hotspot screen appears. 3. Connect the computer to the phone with the USB data/

charging cable. 4. Touch USB Tethering to turn tethering On or Off. When On, a check mark appears in the check box. Note: Using Tethering requires a subscription to your Wireless Providers mobile data service. Connections 127 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY VPN You can use your phones VPN (Virtual Private Network) feature to connect to VPNs. Configuring VPN Settings For information about configuring your phones VPN settings, see VPN on page 177. Accessing a VPN 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. The Settings screen appears. 2. Under Wireless and network, touch More settings VPN. The VPN screen appears, listing available VPN connections. 3. Touch a VPN and follow any prompts to access the network. Nearby devices Share files with nearby DLNA certified devices over Wi-Fi.

(For information on configuring Nearby devices, For more information, refer to Nearby devices on page 178..) Note: To use Nearby devices for sharing, you must have set up a connection with another Wi-Fi device that supports DLNA. 1. Connect your phone and another DLNA certified device to the same Wi-Fi network. (For more information, refer to Wi-Fi on page 120..) 2. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. The Settings screen appears. 3. Under Wireless and network, touch More settings 4. Touch File sharing Nearby devices. The Nearby devices screen appears. to turn file sharing via to turn file DLNA On, or touch File sharing sharing via DLNA Off. 128 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY AllShare Cast AllShare Cast lets your phone share the contents of its display with other Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified devices, such as Smart televisions. Kies Via Wi-Fi Samsung Kies is a software that enables you to update your device firmware, synchronize files, and transfer data to and from your device directly by connecting to the PC. Note: To view more information about DLNA certified products visit http://www.dlna.org/home. 1. Connect your phone and another DLNA certified device to the same Wi-Fi network. (For more information, refer to Wi-Fi on page 120..) 2. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. The Settings screen appears. 3. Under Wireless and network, touch More settings . The Wireless and networks screen appears. 4. Touch AllShare Cast. The AllShare Cast screen appears with AllShare Cast already active and begins scanning for available devices. All detected DLNA certified devices are listed under Available devices. 5. Touch the desired device to establish a connection. You can now view the contents of your phones display on the connected device. Note: Some features will be supported through the System Updates feature in the future. (For more information, refer to Software Update on page 206.) To learn more about Samsung Kies and Samsung applications, browse featured applications and download Kies at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads. Note: Samsung Kies works on both PC and Macintosh computers. Connections 129 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Connecting With Samsung Kies 1. Install Samsung Kies software on your PC. Warning! Close any running applications before connecting your device to a PC. 2. Run Samsung Kies. 3. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. The Settings screen appears. 4. Touch More settings Kies via Wi-Fi. Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air. 5. Follow the prompts from Kies to update your device firmware. 6. Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information. Managing Downloads Files, apps, and other items you download in Browser, Gmail, Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablets internal storage. You can use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete what you have downloaded. To manage the demands on their networks or to help you avoid unexpected charges, some mobile networks place restrictions on the size of the files you can download. When you are connected to such networks, and you try to download an oversized-file, you are asked or required to delay downloading the file until the next time you are connected to a Wi-Fi network. At that time, the download resumes automatically. The Downloads app can also be used to view and manage these queued files. Downloaded files are stored in the Download directory in your tablets internal storage. You can view and copy files from this directory when connected to a computer with a USB cable. 130 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Uninstalling an App Apps come pre-installed on your device and you can download additional apps from Google Play. If you decide to, you can uninstall apps you downloaded from Google Play and other sources. There are several ways to uninstall an app:

1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings Application manager. 2. Touch the Downloaded tab. 3. Touch the app you want to uninstall. 4. Touch the Uninstall button. A pop-up displays the message Application will be uninstalled. 5. Touch OK to confirm you want to uninstall the app. You can also use Google Play to uninstall apps you downloaded from there (see Play Store on page 156). Tip: To uninstall updates to pre-installed apps, touch the app and touch Uninstall updates. A pop-up displays the message All updates to this Android system app will be uninstalled. Touch OK to uninstall the updates. To uninstall an app from the Apps screen:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch Menu Downloaded applications. The Downloaded applications screen displays. Apps. 3. Touch Menu Uninstall. A appears on Apps that can be uninstalled. 4. Touch an apps icon and then touch OK to uninstall and remove the app from your tablet. Note: You cannot uninstall the apps that are included with Android. You can only uninstall the apps you have downloaded. Connections 131 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Synchronizing with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC. 1. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable. Your computer recognizes the connection and displays the AutoPlay screen. 2. Click the option to Sync digital media files to this device to synchronize music files. 3. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync list and begin synchronizing. 4. When finished, exit Windows Media Player and disconnect the USB cable. Connecting as a Mass Storage Device You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the device, you can also access the files directory from the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader. Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as folder Card, separate from the internal memory, which is folder Tablet. 1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files from or to the memory card. 2. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable. Your computer recognizes the connection and displays the AutoPlay screen. 3. Click the option to Open device to view files. You should see a Card and a Tablet folder. 4. Copy files from the PC to the memory card (Card folder). 5. When finished, close the PC folder and disconnect the USB cable. 132 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Memory Card Your device supports removable microSD or microSDHC memory cards for storing music, photos, videos, and files. Installing and Removing a Memory Card For more information about installing and removing a memory card, see Memory Card on page 15. Important! To prevent damage to information stored on the memory card, always unmount the card before removing it from the device. Formatting a Memory Card Formatting erases all content from the memory card and prepares it for use with your device. Formatting a Memory Card Using Your Device 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings Storage. 2. After mounting the SD card, touch Format SD card. 3. Follow the prompts to confirm the formatting of the card. Formatting a Memory Card Using Your Computer Consult your computer and/or memory card reader documentation for information about formatting memory cards. Connections 133 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 8: Applications and Widgets This section contains a description of the function of each application and widget pre-loaded on your tablet and available on the Apps and Widgets screens and the Mini App Tray, and how to launch the applications. For instructions on how to access the widgets by adding them to a Home screen panel, see Adding Widgets to a Home screen on page 41. Tip: To open applications quickly, add their shortcuts to frequently-used applications to one of the Home screens. For details, see App Shortcuts on page 40. This section also provides information on how to navigate through Samsung-provided applications. If the application is already described in another section of this user manual, a cross reference to that particular section is provided. Tip: For information on applications and widgets provided by your Wireless Provider or a Third Party, follow the on-

screen prompts or contact your Wireless Provider. 134 Apps Screen The Apps screen displays all applications installed on your wireless device. Applications that you download and install from Google Play, from Samsung Apps, or from the web are also added to a Home screen panel. Accessing the Apps Screen 1. From a Home screen, touch the top of the Apps screen. Changing the Apps Screen The Apps icons are arranged in a Customizable grid. To arrange the Apps icons in alphabetical order:

Apps Apps tab (at 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Touch Alphabetical grid. Menu View type. Apps Apps tab. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY To manually change the order of the icons on the Apps screen:

Apps Apps tab. Menu View type Customizable grid. Menu Edit. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Touch 4. Touch and hold an icon and drag it to a new position. 5. Touch Save to save the changes. Tip: You can place shortcuts to applications on the Home screen panels for quick access to the applications. For more information, refer to App Shortcuts on page 40. To view your downloaded applications:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Touch an icon on the Downloaded applications screen Menu Downloaded applications. Apps Apps tab. to launch the application. or Add an App Shortcut to a Home screen by dragging the App icon onto the Home Screen. (For more information, refer to App Shortcuts on page 40.) Application Information To view information about an App, such as the amount of storage it uses, force the App to stop, uninstall updates, and clear data:

1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Apps tab Settings Application manager. 2. Touch the All tab, scroll through the apps list, and touch the app to open a screen with details about the App. Update Available When you open an application that is preloaded on your device, an Update Available message may be displayed if there is a new version of the app available. Touch Upgrade to update the app or touch Not Now to open the app without updating. For more information, refer to Updates to Downloaded Apps on page 156. Applications and Widgets 135 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Location of Internal Antennas GPS Antenna Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Antenna

(Back view of device) GPS Applications GPS applications allow you to achieve real-time, GPS-

enabled, turn-by-turn navigation and to access local searches based on a variety of category parameters. To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the following conditions:

inside a building or between buildings

in a tunnel or underground passage

in poor weather

around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields

in a vehicle with tinted windows Global GPS turn-by-turn navigation, mapping, and Point of Interest content is available for three continents, including North America (U.S., Canada, and Mexico), Western Europe, and China, where wireless coverage is available. Important! If you touch or cover the internal GPS antenna while using GPS services, it may impede the GPS signal resulting in the GPS services not working in an optimal manner. Refer to the following diagram to locate the approximate location of the internal GPS antenna. 136 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Alarm Set alarms for reminders or for wake-up times. You can be reminded or awakened by your tablet playing a melody, vibrating, or reading a briefing of the current time, your daily schedule, weather information, and news headlines. Adding and Configuring Alarms 1. From the Apps screen, touch Alarm. 2. Touch Create alarm or touch an alarm that is already set. 3. Touch fields to configure the alarm:

Set time: Set a time for the alarm to sound. Touch the buttons above or below the hour and minute, and above AM / PM.

Alarm repeat: Choose days for the alarm to repeat. Alarm days are blue.

Repeat weekly: Set the alarm to repeat at the same time every week.

Alarm type: Select whether your device plays a Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, Briefing (reads alarm time, todays schedule, weather information, and news headlines).

Volume: Touch and drag the slider to set alarm volume.

Alarm tone: Choose a tone for the alarm to play.

Snooze: Enable or disable the snooze option for the alarm. If enabled, set the following options:

Interval: Set the snooze duration to 3, 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes. Repeat: Set the snooze to repeat 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 times.

Smart alarm: Activates simulated nature sounds prior to the main alarm. If enabled, set the following options:

Interval: Set the duration to 3, 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes. Tone: Set the Smart alarm tone.

Name: Touch the field and use the keyboard to enter a name for the alarm. 4. Touch Save to save the alarm. The main Alarm screen displays listing the new or updated alarm. Activating Alarms 1. From the Apps screen, touch Alarm. 2. Touch Turn alarm on to activate the alarm. A gray alarm icon means the alarm is deactivated. 3. Touch an alarm to change any of its settings and then touch Save to save the updates. Applications and Widgets 137 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Editing and Deleting Alarms 1. From the Apps screen, touch Alarm. 2. Touch and hold an alarm and then touch one of the following options:

Edit: Edit the alarm. For more information, refer to Adding and Configuring Alarms on page 137.

Delete: Delete the alarm. or Touch to delete or touch Select all, and then touch Delete, touch the existing alarms you want Delete. Turning Off an Alarm When the alarm sounds, to turn off the alarm:

Touch and drag to the right. Setting the Snooze Feature To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds:

Important! Snooze must first be set in the alarm settings. Touch and slide to the left. 138 AllShare Play AllShare PlayTM allows your tablet to stream photos, music, and videos from its memory to other DLNA certifiedTM (Digital Living Network Alliance) devices. Your tablet can also play digital content streamed from other DLNA certified devices. Note: To view more information about DLNA certified products visit http://www.dlna.org/home. Configuring AllShare Play Before using AllShare Play, connect both of your communicating devices to the same Wi-Fi network, and use an registered and active Samsung account. (For more information, refer to Turning Wi-Fi On or Off on page 169.) Connect to Wi-Fi, configure AllShare Play settings to identify your device as a server, and set treatment of copied files. Important! The Samsung account manages the access information (username and password) to several applications, such as AllShare Play. 1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. (For more information, refer to Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network on page 121.) DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 2. From the Apps screen, touch AllShare Play. Note: If prompted, read the on-screen message about network charges and touch OK to continue. The AllShare Play Sign In screen displays. 3. Touch Sign in. The Samsung account screen displays. 4. Touch Create new account, if you have not set up a Samsung account, or touch Sign in, if you have already set up a Samsung account.

(For more information, refer to Samsung Account on page 10.) The AllShare Play Start screen displays. 5. Touch Start. The AllShare Play main screen displays. Menu 6. For more information, touch FAQ. Gallery, when Share to share a file, you see Group Cast as Using Group Cast While using various applications, such as you touch an option. Group Cast is an easy way to share files in real time with others who are on the same Wi-Fi network. Group Cast can be used when you want to share documents, images, music, and so on. You can use Group Cast for meetings, sales presentations, conferences, and classes. All you need is a Wi-Fi network that works with Group Cast, and most do. To share a file using Group Cast:

1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Navigate to the file you want to share and touch Apps Gallery. Share Group Cast. For more information, refer to Gallery on page 98. Note: After the initial Group Cast request, touch Group Cast instead of Share. 3. Use the keyboard to enter a PIN code and touch Done. This process lets you make sure only your preferred recipients can view your shared image. Applications and Widgets 139 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY The AllShare Play - Group Cast screen displays and the device waits for other connected recipients to accept the connection and enter the PIN on their screens. 4. Touch OK to start the group cast process while other users connect. You can now interact and draw with the on-screen image, and users will instantaneously see the same gestures and also be able to interact. Calculator The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions to solve simple arithmetic problems and advanced operators to solve more complex problems. 1. From the Apps screen, touch 2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys. 3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the Calculator.

+ (add), - (subtract), (multiply), or (divide) key. Note: The newly altered image (with markups and comments) can not be saved, but you can take a screen shot of the current image and save it to your Clipboard. For more information, refer to Screen Capture on page 33. 4. Enter the next number. 5. To view the result, touch the = (equals) key. 6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as many times as required. 7. Touch 8. For more advanced problems, rotate your device to to clear the result. landscape mode and use the advanced operators sin, ln, cos, log, tan, and so on, just as you would on a pocket calculator. 9. Touch and hold entries in the Calculators display field to copy or cut the contents of the display. Copied to clipboard displays. Paste the copied value in another app. 140 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Calendar Your device includes a powerful Calendar to help you organize your schedules more conveniently and effectively. Learn to create and manage events and tasks, and set alarms to remind yourself of important events and tasks. Tip: A shortcut to Calendar displays on a Home screen by default. 1. From the Apps screen, touch Calendar. 2. Touch a tab to choose a calendar view:

List: Display only event and task names and dates for a selected year. Touch a year at the bottom of the screen to display another year. Touch a date to hide or show the event or task name.

Task: Display your list of tasks. Touch the sort field to change how your tasks are sorted. Tasks can be sorted by due date, priority, date, week, month, or group. 3. To view other days or other weeks, swipe left or right across the screen. Swipe up or down the screen to view other events.

Year: Display all twelve months of this year. Sweep across the 4. To find an event or task, touch Search. years at the bottom of the screen to display another year.

Month: Display the current month. Touch a month and year at the bottom of the screen to display another month.

Week: Display the current week. Touch a week at the bottom of the screen to display another week.

Day: Display todays schedule by hour. Touch day at the bottom of the screen to display another day. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a search term. Possible events display as you type. Touch Touch an event to send, edit, or delete the event. on the keyboard to remove it. 5. Touch Add event / Add task and then touch Done to add a new event to your calendar. For more information, refer to Creating an Event or Task on page 142. Applications and Widgets 141 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 6. Touch Menu for these options:

Zoom in: In the Week and Day views, increase the size of the area being viewed.

Zoom out: In the Week and Day views, decrease the size of the area being viewed.

Go to: Use the Set date pop-up to enter a date and then touch Set to display and highlight that date on your calendar.

Delete: Delete events for the year, month, week, day, week, month, before today, or all events, depending on the Calendar view.

Sync: Manually synchronizes the calendar entries among all of your current accounts, for example, Gmail, Exchange, and so on.

Show controls / Hide controls: Show or hide a small month calendar and a list of events in landscape mode.

Settings: Customize the calendar. For more information, refer to Calendar Settings on page 144.

Enable Handwriting mode / Disable Handwriting mode:

Lets you add/remove/change handwritten notes or drawn highlights on a Month calendar. 7. Touch Today to return to the current date. 142 8. Touch Calendars to configure which events to display. Touch Add account to add additional accounts from which calendar events can be synced. Creating an Event or Task To create an event or task:

1. From the Apps screen, touch Calendar. 2. Double-tap the date for which you want to enter an all day event or task.

Touch the Add event or Add task tab.

Touch the My calendar field and touch a calendar to which the even or task should be added.

Use the keyboard to enter the event or task name. or Touch the date for which you want to enter an event or task.

Touch

Touch the Add event or Add task tab.

Enter the event or task information. 3. Touch Save. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Managing Events You can delete, send, and edit events on your mobile device:

Add Additional Calendar Accounts To add additional accounts:

1. From the Apps screen, touch Calendar. 2. Touch an event. A pop-up displays event information. The following options are available:

To forward the event using your primary email account, touch Forward.

To delete the event, touch Menu Delete, select Only this event or All repetitive events, then touch OK.

To share the event, touch Menu Share via, then touch Bluetooth, ChatON, Dropbox, Email, or Wi-Fi Direct.

To update the event details, touch Menu Edit. 1. From the Apps screen, touch Calendar Calendars Add account. or From the Apps screen, touch Accounts, then touch Add account. The Add account menu pops-up. Settings under 2. Touch an account type and enter your account information.

(For more information, refer to Accounts on page 198.) Applications and Widgets 143 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Calendar Settings To set up Calendar preferences:

1. From the Apps screen, touch Calendar. 2. Touch Menu Settings. The following options display:

View settings

First day of week: Choose a day to begin each week.

Hide declined events: Enable or disable display of events.

Lock time zone: Allows you to lock event times and dates based on your selected time zone, which is defined by the following field.

Select time zone: If Lock time zone is enabled, used this option to select a time zone to lock event times and dates.

Show week number: Show the week number to the left of each week in the Month view.

Calendars: Enable calendars for your various accounts.

Handwriting settings: Choose the First day of week and whether to Show week number for Handwritting mode. 144 Event notification

Set alerts & notifications: Touch to select, which allows you to set the Alert, Status bar notification, or Off.

Select ringtone: Choose a tone for calendar notifications.

Vibration: Enable/disable vibration for calendar notifications.

Default reminder time: Set the default time for a notification before an event is to occur.

Notifications while screen is off: Enable or disable the display of notifications on the full screen while the screen is turned off.

Quick responses: Edit default quick responses for emailing guests. Sync settings

Sync events/tasks: Displays the General sync settings. For more information, refer to Accounts on page 198.

(Accounts)

Touch an account and then touch the check box to enable or disable calendar and tasks synchronization for that account. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Camera Take photos and record video with your devices built in Camera. For more information, refer to Camera on page 102. Tip: A shortcut to Camera displays on the main Home screen by default. From the Home screen, touch Camera. or From the Apps screen, touch Camera. ChatON ChatON is a global mobile social communication service. You can chat with multiple buddies at the same time. 1. From the Home screen, touch ChatON. or From a Home screen, touch or From the Apps screen, touch ChatON. ChatON. 2. At the Attention pop-up, touch OK to access ChatON. To block this pop-up in the future, touch Do not show again. In the ChatON screen, select your country or region code, then touch Done. 3. Applications and Widgets 145 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Chrome Chrome launches the Google Chrome Internet browser. From the Apps screen, touch Chrome. or From a Home screen, touch Chrome. Contacts Store contact information for your friends, family and colleagues, to quickly access information or to send a message. For more information, refer to Contacts on page 57. Tip: A shortcut to Contacts displays on a Home screen by default. From a Home screen, touch Contacts. or From the Apps screen, touch Contacts. 146 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Crayon physics Your drawings are transformed into physical objects in a game in which you solve puzzles with your artistic vision and creative use of physics. 1. Detach the S Pen from your tablet, then touch Crayon physics. or From the Apps screen, touch Downloads Files, apps, and other items you download in Browser, Email, Gmail, or in other ways, are stored on your tablets internal storage. Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete what you have downloaded. Downloads. 1. From the Apps screen, touch 2. Touch the Internet downloads tab or the Other Crayon physics. downloads tab. 2. For more information, touch HOW TO PLAY. 3. To open a download, touch it. 4. To share one or more downloads with other devices, touch the check box(es) for the download(s) you want to share, to check them, then touch Touch an option to share the download(s): Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Google+, Group Cast, Photo editor, Picasa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube. Share. 5. To delete one or more downloads, touch the check box(es) for the download(s) you want to delete, to check them, and then touch The items are deleted from your tablet. Delete. Applications and Widgets 147 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 6. To change how the downloads list is sorted, touch Sort by size or Sort by date, at the bottom of the Downloads pop-up. Game Hub Samsung Game Hub is your one stop for the hottest social and premium games. Note: Game Hub service requires a Samsung account and depends on service availability. From the Apps screen, touch Game Hub. Gmail Send and receive email with Gmail, Googles web-based email. For more information, refer to Gmail on page 76. From a Home screen, touch Apps Gmail. Dropbox Dropbox is a cloud file storage service. The Dropbox app lets you create an account with Dropbox or link with your existing Dropbox account. (For more information, refer to https://www.dropbox.com/.) From the Apps screen, touch Dropbox. Email Send and receive email using popular email services. From the Apps screen, touch Email. For more information, refer to Email on page 68. Gallery Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos. From the Apps screen, touch Gallery. or From a Home screen, touch Gallery. For more information, refer to Gallery on page 98. 148 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Google Search the internet using the GoogleTM search engine. 1. From the Lock screen, touch and slide

. or From a Home screen panel, touch or From a Home screen panel, touch Google. Apps 2. Use the keyboard to enter search criteria to display matching searches. or Touch clearly. Suggestions display below the text entry area. and speak the search criteria slowly and 3. Touch a suggestion to search for that term or touch on the keyboard to start the search. A browser window displays the search results. Google+

Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+. To get started:

1. From a Home screen panel, touch Apps Google+. The Google+ home screen displays. 2. Follow the prompts to use Google+. Applications and Widgets 149 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Group Cast Share your experiences with friends in real time while you view documents and photos or listen to music. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Internet Your device includes a full HTML Browser, to access the Internet. For more information, refer to Internet on page 112. Tip: A shortcut to Browser displays on the main Home screen by default. From the Lock screen, touch and swipe

. or From the Home screen, touch or From a Home screen panel, touch Internet. Internet. Apps Group Cast. 2. Follow the instructions in the Group Cast pop-up. Help Use Help to read or view brief instructions or videos on how to use the features and settings available with your tablet. Help. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps The Help screen appears. 2. Select a topic from the menu on the left side of the screen. 3. Read or view the selected topic information in the right side of the screen. 150 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Local Google Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own locations. The Local application allows you to find the best sources for business information across the web, including business listing details, reviews, photos, nearby public transit, and other related information. Business owners can provide additional details, such as photos, hours of operation, and coupons. Local. 1. From a Home screen, touch 2. Follow the prompts to locate businesses and view their Apps information. 3. For more information about Local, touch Menu Help. Maps Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions, and other location-based information. Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some features require Standalone or Google location services.

(For more information, refer to Location services on page 187.) 1. From the Home screen, touch Maps. or From a Home screen, touch Apps 2. For information about using Maps, touch Maps. Help. Applications and Widgets 151 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Media Hub Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content. For more information, refer to Media Hub on page 86. Music Player Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer. For more information, refer to Music Player on page 89. Note: Media Hub service requires a Samsung account and Tip: A shortcut to Music Player displays on a Home screen by depends on service availability. default. From a Home screen, touch Apps From a Home screen, touch Music Player. or From a Home screen, touch Music Player. Apps Media Hub. Messenger With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation. For more information, refer to Messenger on page 84. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Messenger. 2. For more information about Local, touch Menu Help Messenger. 152 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY My Files Find, view, and manage folders and files, such as music files, photo files, video files, and so on, stored on your tablet. If the file is associated with an application on your device, you can launch the file in the application. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps My Files. 2. Touch a folder and scroll down or up until you locate a file. Note: You may have to touch one or more subfolders before you encounter files. 3. Touch a file to launch it in the associated application, if the file is associated with an application. 4. While browsing files, use these controls:

Up: Display a higher directory. Search: Use the keyboard to enter a search term. The current folder is searched and results are displayed. Touch X to remove the search field. Display mode: Enable thumbnails for each file. or Enable list mode. Root: Display the root directory. Add Folder: Add a new folder in the current folder. Mark files: Touch the box to the left of each file or next to the folder to select all files in the folder. Then touch send via, copy, cut, or delete in the Application Bar. 5. To view a photo file:

Touch the file. The Gallery app is used to open the photo. For more information, refer to Viewing Photos and Videos on page 99. 6. To view a video file:

Touch the file. The Video Player is launched and plays the video. For more information, refer to Video Player on page 95. Applications and Widgets 153 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Navigation Use Google Navigation to find a destination and to get walking or driving directions. Note: You must first create a Wi-Fi connection to use Navigation. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Navigation. 2. Follow the prompts to obtain walking or driving directions. Play Books Use the Play Books app to read eBooks from the Internet-

based Google Play Books service. Google eBooks is a new way to discover, buy, and enjoy your favorite books online and offline. You can read books online or mark them for availability offline, so you can read them when you have no Internet connection (such as on an airplane). You can also use Books as your starting point for browsing or searching for books on line. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 3. For more information about Navigation, touch Play Books. Menu Help. 2. Follow the prompts to start reading books. Paper Artist Using Paper Artist, you can draw or convert photos or images into line art of any of several types and edit and color them. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Paper Artist. 2. Follow the prompts to create or change a drawing. Note: You may be asked to create or sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76. 154 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Play Magazines Google Play Magazines helps you subscribe to your favorite magazines so you can have them available to read on your tablet at your leisure. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Play Magazines. 2. Follow the prompts to start reading magazines. Help. 3. For more information touch Menu Note: You may be asked to create or sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76. Play Movies & TV The Play Movies & TV app is available for select Android devices. Any movie you rent from the Google Play Store can be downloaded for offline viewing through this application. In addition, the Play Movies & TV app can be used to stream your Google Play movie rentals as well as play any of your personal videos stored on your tablet. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Play Movies & TV. 2. For more information touch Menu Help. Play Music Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Play Music. 2. Follow the prompts to start playing music. 3. For more information touch Menu Help. Applications and Widgets 155 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Play Store Google Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your device. It also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag an application that might be incompatible with your device. Updates to Downloaded Apps You can check for new versions of applications by visiting the Google Play Store. Items that have a new version available will say Update. You can also select apps that you would like to be updated automatically. To do this:

1. From the Home screen, touch 2. Touch 3. Touch the Installed tab to list the Play Store apps Installed Apps. Play Store. installed on your device. Update is displayed is there is an update available for the app. 4. Touch Allow automatic updating on an app to enable automatic updating. 5. Touch Open to open the app on your device. 6. Touch Update to update the app on your device. Tip: A shortcut to Play Store displays on the main Home screen by default. 1. From the Home screen, touch Play Store. or From a Home screen, touch Apps Play Store. Note: You may be asked to create or sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76. 2. Follow the prompts to list, find, select, and download applications. 3. For more information touch Menu Help. 156 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Polaris Office Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite. This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline. The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) files. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps PS Touch You can use Adobe Photoshop (PS) Touch to combine images, apply professional effects, and share the results through social networking sites. For more information about PS Touch, go to http://www.adobe.com/products/photoshop-touch.html. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Polaris Office. PS Touch. 2. Enter your Email information, if desired, and touch 2. For instructions on using PS Touch, touch Tutorials. Register to complete the process. or Touch Skip to ignore this registration. The main Polaris Office screen displays. Recent documents displays a list of recently opened documents. 3. To get help for using Polaris Office, touch Menu Help User Guide. Applications and Widgets 157 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY S Note Create and manage text memos and use Bluetooth to send memos to paired Bluetooth devices. From the Lock screen, touch and swipe

. or From a Home screen panel, touch Apps S Note. Composing a Memo 1. From the Home screen, touch Apps S Note. 3. Touch Menu for the following options:

Refresh: Redisplay the list of memos.

Sort by: Select whether to sort the memo list by Date, Title, or Color.

List view / Thumbnail view: Select to show your memos as a list of thumbnail images and related memo names or to show your memos as an array of thumbnail images.

Import: Copy an Image file or PDF file into a memo.

Sync: Synchronize your memos with your Google Docs or Evernote account. 2. Touch New memo, compose the memo, then

Create folder: Create a folder in which to copy or move touch Save to save. memos. For more information, refer to Entering Text on page 47. Memo List Options While viewing the list of Memos:

Change order: Reorder your list of memos.n

Copy: Save a copy of one or more selected memos into a new or existing folder. 1. Touch Menu List to view your memos in a list

Move: Move one or more selected memos into a new or mode. Touch an entry to view or edit it. 2. To delete one or more memos, touch Delete, select one or all memos, and touch Delete. 158 existing folder.

Settings: Review and/or change Auto sync, Add page, Input language, Note creation, and Drawing guide lines settings for your memos.

Tutorial: View instructions on using S Memo. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 4. Touch and hold a memo thumbnail or list entry to display the following options:

Share via: Touch Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or Wi-Fi Direct to send the memo by the selected method. For more information, refer to Bluetooth on page 122.

Export: Save a copy of this memo as an Image file or PDF file.

Copy: Save a copy of this memo into a new or existing folder.

Move: Move this memo into a new or existing folder.

Rename: Change the name of this memo.

Delete: Delete the selected memo.

Lock / Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN number to remove the lock form the memo. Once you lock a memo, you have to use your PIN number to view the memo.

Set as shortcut: Create a shortcut to access this memo on the Home screen.

Print: Send this memo to a Samsung printer. S Suggest This application provides on-screen recommendations for applications that are specifically supported and made for use on your device. 1. From a Home screen panel, touch Apps S Suggest. The Country or region list displays. 2. Touch a country or region in the list (for example, United States) and then touch OK. The Terms and conditions display. 3. Touch the Agree check box and then touch Agree. The S Suggest main screen displays. 4. Select an application from one of the available categories (Picks, Categories, Games, Friends, and Info). 5. Follow the on-screen download and installation instructions. Applications and Widgets 159 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY S Voice Launch tablet features and apps by speaking voice commands. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps S_Voice. 2. Follow the prompts. 160 Samsung Apps Access downloadable applications and games to install on your device. Note: Samsung Apps service requires a Samsung account and depends on service availability. From the Home screen, touch Samsung_Apps. or From a Home screen panel, touch Apps Samsung_Apps. Settings Configure your device to your preferences. For more information, refer to Settings on page 168. Tip: A shortcut to Settings displays on the main Home screen by default. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Talk Use Google Talk to chat with other Google Talk users. For more information, refer to Google Talk on page 80. Apps Talk. From a Home screen, touch Video Editor Video Editor lets you custom-make your own videos. You can add themes, music, pictures, and other videos to your video. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Video Editor. 2. Touch New Project. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Smart Remote Allows you to locate and watch programming on your TV and then control your entertainment system with gestures from the device. For more information, go to: http://www.peel.com. Discover and control TV programming right from your device. Lose your remotes, once and for all. Quit scrolling those tiresome grid guides. See what you want, right at your own fingertips: your shows, your controls, your friends. Peel suggests Top Pick TV shows for you based on what you watch and like. Instead of a long, boring channel grid, Peel presents an easy-to-use mosaic of your favorite shows, filtered by type and genre in the order you like. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Smart Remote. The Samsung Disclaimer displays. 2. Touch Agree. 3. Touch Set Up Smart Remote Now: US & Canada. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Applications and Widgets 161 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Video Player View and manage videos stored on your tablet. For more information, refer to Video Player on page 95. World Clock View the date and time in any time zone. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Tip: A shortcut to Video Player displays on a Home screen by default. From a Home screen, touch Video Player. or From a Home screen, touch Video Player. Apps Voice Search Search the internet by speaking to the GoogleTM search engine. From a Home screen, touch Apps Voice Search. World Clock. A map of the world displays with the locations you have added flagged. 2. Touch Add to add a city to display. A list of world cities displays in landscape mode. 3. Scroll through the list and touch the city you want to add. Tip: Touch the first letter of the citys name, to the right of the list, to find the city more quickly. or In portrait or landscape mode, touch and turn the globe to locate a city and touch the city you want to add. A pop-up displays the city name, current time, and date there, and the GMT offset. 4. Touch the on the pop-up to add the city. 162 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 5. Touch Reorder to change the order of the cities. on an entry and drag the Touch and hold the grid entry to a new position in the list. Touch Done to change the order. YouTube View YouTube videos on your tablet and upload videos from your tablet to your YouTube account. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 6. Touch Delete to remove entries. Touch the box to YouTube. check the cities you want to remove (a green check mark displays), then touch Delete. 7. Touch and hold an entry to remove it or to set the DST settings, which enable or disable Daylight Savings Time adjustments. 2. Follow the on-screen prompts to setup or access your YouTube account. Applications and Widgets 163 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Widgets Widgets are self-contained applications that you can place on the Home screen panels to access your favorite features. When you first turn on your tablet, there are various widgets on the Home screen panels. Accessing the Widgets Menu From a Home screen, touch Apps Widgets tab

(at the top of the Apps screen. The following widgets are available:

Alarm: Add an alarm then touch the widget to edit the alarm. For more information, refer to Alarm on page 137.

AllShare Cast: View/listen to an AllShare Cast on a Home screen panel.

Application monitor: Monitor and control active or downloaded programs, RAM, or Storage. For more information, refer to Task Manager on page 14.

Assistive Light: Use the camera flash on the back of your tablet as a flashlight.

Book: Touch this widget and then touch a book for quick access to the book. (For more information, refer to Play Books on page 154.) 164

Bookmark: Directly access an Internet browser bookmark. (For more information, refer to Internet on page 150.)

Bookmarks: View and directly access Chrome browser bookmarks. (For more information, refer to Chrome on page 146.)

Calendar: Displays a list of your events. (For more information, refer to Calendar on page 141.)

Calendar (mini today): Use Calendar to organize events and tasks for a day. (For more information, refer to Calendar on page 141.)

Calendar (month): Use S Planner to organize events and tasks for a month. (For more information, refer to Calendar on page 141.)

Clock (funky): Display a funky, analog clock.

Clock (modern): Display a modern, analog clock.

Contact (3 x 1): Display a link to one of your contacts to quickly compose an Email or Gmail message. (For more information, refer to Messaging on page 68.)

Contact (1 x 1): Display a shortcut to one of your contact entries. (For more information, refer to Contacts on page 57.) DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Digital clock: Display the digital time, the day, and the date.

Directions & Navigation: Get directions and navigation from Google Maps. (For more information, refer to Maps on page 151.)

Dropbox Folder: Directly access one of your Dropbox folders.

(For more information, refer to Dropbox on page 148.)

Dual clock (analog): Display the date and time for two different locations using analog clocks.

Dual clock (digital): Display the date and time for two different locations using a digital format.

Email: Display your email inbox. (For more information, refer to Email on page 68.)

Game Hub: Directly access games listed with GameHub. (For more information, refer to Game Hub on page 148.)

Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Googles web-

based email. (For more information, refer to Gmail on page 76.)

Gmail label: Access a Gmail label. Displays once a Gmail account is set up. Touch the label to which you want to link.

(For more information, refer to Setting Up Your Gmail Account on page 76.)

Google Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based Google Play Books service. (For more information, refer to Play Books on page 154.)

Google Play Music: Use this widget to control the playback of songs playing in the Music app. (For more information, refer to Options While Playing a Song on page 95.)

Google Search: Display a Google Search bar. (For more information, refer to Google on page 149.)

Google+ posts: Display a shortcut to Google+TM posts. (For more information, refer to Google+ on page 84.)

Media Hub: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from the convenience of anywhere.

(For more information, refer to Media Hub on page 86.)

Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with one earbud.

Music Player: The Music Player allows you to play music files that you have stored on your device and memory card. You can also create playlists. (For more information, refer to Music Player on page 89.) Applications and Widgets 165 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Music playlist: Choose a music playlist to access from a home screen. (For more information, refer to Playing a Playlist on page 91.)

Negative colors: Reverse the colors on your tablets screen.

Picture frame: Allows you to select one or more pictures and then touch the arrow on the widget for a slide show. (For more information, refer to Gallery on page 98.)

Play My Library: Directly access selections from Play Books, Play Magazines, Play Music, and/or Play Movies & TV libraries.

Play Recommendations: Play recommendations from Play Store Apps, Play Music, Play Books, Play Magazines, and/or Play Movies & TV libraries.

Play Store: Download applications from the Google Play Store. (For more information, refer to Play Store on page 156.)

S Bookmark: Create a bookmark for a favorite website. (For more information, refer to Using Bookmarks on page 115.)

S Bookmarks: Choose one of your Browser bookmarks then touch the widget to open the website. (For more information, refer to Using Bookmarks on page 115.) 166

S Note: Create and save a memo on a Home screen. (For more information, refer to S Note on page 158.)

S Suggest: Recommends popular applications, when your device is connected to a Wi-Fi, that are guaranteed to be compatible with your device. (For more information, refer to S Suggest on page 159.)

Settings shortcut: Allows you to create a shortcut to a particular Settings item. (For more information, refer to Settings on page 168.)

Software Update: Directly access software updates for your tablet. (For more information, refer to Software Update on page 206.)

Traffic: Enter a name for the widget and a destination, and then touch Save. Touch the widget to use the Traffic component of the Maps application. (For more information, refer to Maps on page 151.)

Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on your tablet.

(For more information, refer to Video Player on page 95.)

Weather: Display the forecast from AccuWeather. Touch the widget to choose locations.

Yahoo! Finance: Search for and add stocks. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Yahoo! News: Display current news and much more from Yahoo!

YouTube: Search YouTube and watch videos. (For more information, refer to YouTube on page 163.) Applications and Widgets 167 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Accessing Additional Options To access additional setting options, touch the setting tab. Section 9: Settings Accessing Settings From a Home screen panel, touch Apps Settings. or From any screen, touch the Time in the System Bar, then touch to Quick Settings on page 36) The Settings menu appears. Settings. (For more information, refer Using Setting Sliders To enable or disable a setting, touch the setting slider as shown. 168 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Wireless and network Wi-Fi Set up and manage your mobile devices connections to Wi-

Fi networks. Your mobile device supports Wi-Fi a/b/g/n. For more information about using Wi-Fi, see Wi-Fi on page 120. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Turn your mobile devices Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn Wi-Fi service on, your mobile device automatically searches for nearby available Wi-Fi networks. Tip: When you turn Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically searches for available networks and displays them. You can also turn Wi-Fi On or Off from the Quick Settings panel. Turn Wi-Fi On:

From the Settings screen, touch Wi-Fi OFF

. or From the Home screen and others, touch and swipe the Status Bar downward, then touch Wi-Fi. Turn Wi-Fi Off:

From the Settings screen, touch Wi-Fi ON

. or From the Home screen and others, touch and swipe the Status Bar downward, then touch Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi Settings Configure and manage connections to Wi-Fi access points. 1. From the Settings screen, touch Wi-Fi. The Wi-Fi options screen appears. 2. Touch options to configure:

Add network: Connect to a new Wi-Fi network. (For more information, see Adding a Wi-Fi Network Manually on page 121.)

Scan: Search for available Wi-Fi networks.

Advanced: View and configure your devices Advanced Wi-Fi settings. Settings 169 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Advanced Wi-Fi settings 1. From the Settings screen, touch Wi-Fi Advanced. 2. Configure settings:

Network notification: When enabled, your device notifies you of nearby Wi-Fi networks when you launch a high data-usage application.

Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: Specify when to switch from Wi-Fi to mobile data for data communications, when your device goes to sleep (when the backlight goes out). This setting can affect your data usage, and the behavior of devices you connect to your device, such as when tethering or using Mobile Hotspot.

MAC address: (Not configurable) View your devices MAC address, needed for connecting to some secured networks

(only shows when Wi-Fi is active).

IP address: (Not configurable) View your devices IP address Bluetooth Your tablet supports Bluetooth 4.0. Bluetooth profiles Bluetooth profiles are specifications for services supported by individual devices. Profiles improve the ability of different devices to work together. Your tablet supports these Bluetooth profiles:

Headset: HSP v1.2 profile supports use of compatible Bluetooth headsets for mono audio.

Stereo: A2DP v1.2, AVRCP v1.0, GAVDP 1.2, AVCTP 1.3 and AVDTP 1.2 profiles support delivery of stereo audio to compatible Bluetooth devices.

Object Exchange: OPP v1.0 profile allows sending and receiving of contact name cards (vCard 2.1) and calendar events

(vCalendar) between devices. PBAP v1.2 supports exchange of Phone Book Objects.

Human Interface Devices: HID v1.0 profile supports certain

(only shows when connected to a Wi-Fi network). interface devices.

Personal Area Networking: PAN 1.0 supports exchange of data with other devices.

Message Access Profile: MAP 1.0 allows exchange of messages between devices, such as with an automotive hands-free device. 170 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Turning Bluetooth On or Off Turn Bluetooth On:

From the Settings screen, touch Bluetooth OFF

. Turn Bluetooth Off:

Bluetooth settings Pair and connect with other Bluetooth devices, manage your Bluetooth connections, and control your devices visibility to other devices. From the Settings screen, touch Bluetooth ON

. Note: Bluetooth must be turned On to access Bluetooth Tip: You can also turn Bluetooth On or Off at the Notifications Panel. settings. 1. From the Settings screen, touch Bluetooth. 2. Touch a setting to configure Bluetooth:

Touch Bluetooth OFF to turn Bluetooth On, or touch Bluetooth ON to turn Bluetooth Off.

Touch your tablets name to enable/disable its visibility to other devices Bluetooth searches. Available when Bluetooth is On.

Touch Scan to search for visible Bluetooth devices. Touch a detected device to pair with it see Connecting with a Bluetooth Device on page 123).

Touch Menu to access the following options:

Rename device: Change your tablets Bluetooth device name. Visibility timeout: Select how long your tablet will remain visible to other devices. Received files: Lists files received from other devices over Bluetooth connections. Settings 171 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Data usage Data usage lets you monitor your data usage (Mobile data and Wi-Fi) over a select period of time. Data usage also lists your apps and shows their individual data usage. Setting a mobile data interval Setting a mobile data interval lets you focus your usage review to multiple calendar periods (such as months) or to a single calendar period (such as a week). Note: Data usage is measure by your device, and your service provider may account for usage differently, so you may want to consider using a conservative limit. Contact your service provider for more information on actual data usage. 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch Data usage. The Data usage screen appears. 2. Select the desired Data usage cycle. 172 3. Select the mobile data interval by touching and dragging the upper (1) and lower (2) boundary lines on the graph. 1 2 The interval dates and amount of data used in that interval appear below the data usage graph. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Viewing data usage by app or process Additional Options 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch Data usage. The Data usage screen appears. 2. Scroll down the page to see the list of processes or apps using Mobile and Wi-Fi data services. Touch a process or app to see data usage for the process or app, and to configure specific settings. touch Data usage. The Data usage screen appears. Menu to access the following options:

2. Touch

Auto sync data: When enabled (with a check mark visible in the check box), all data usage graphs are automatically synchronized.

Mobile hotspots: Lets you identify (check) those Wi-Fi hotspots available to and defined to your device that are mobile hotspots. Such hotspots are likely more expensive to use. You can block background apps from using these networks, and you can set apps to display warnings before using these networks for large downloads. Settings 173 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 2. Set these options:

Mobile data: Enable or disable your tablets connection to the mobile data network. You can also control this setting on the Quick settings pop-up with the Mobile data toggle.

Data roaming: Enable or disable connection to data services when your device is roaming on another network.

Network mode: Configure roaming for CDMA, LTE, and EV-DO networks. LTE/CDMA: Lets your tablet automatically access LTE, CDMA, and/or EV-DO mobile networks when available. CDMA: Restricts your tablet to CDMA mobile networks.

System select: Configure CDMA roaming mode. Home only: Restricts your tablet to your Wireless Providers network. Automatic: Permits your tablet to automatically roam to networks other than that provided by your Wireless Provider. More Wireless and Network Settings Airplane mode When Airplane mode is enabled, all your tablets wireless interfaces (4G network, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth) are disabled. You can, however, re-enable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth and make connections without disabling Airplane mode. While in airplane mode, you can use other features of your tablet, such as updating your calander, playing videos, or using other apps. 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch More settings. The Wireless and network menu appears. 2. Touch Airplane mode to enable or disable Airplane mode. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. Mobile networks Set options for network selection, data service, and roaming behavior. 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch More settings Mobile networks. The Mobile network screen appears. 174 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Use Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot to share your tablets internet connection with up to 5 other devices, through Wi-Fi. You can control whether devices connect to your Portable Wi-

Fi Hotspot with the Allowed device list. For more information about using your device as a mobile hotspot, see Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot on page 126. Note: Using Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot requires a subscription to data service. For more information, contact your Wireless Provider. Using your tablet as a mobile hotspot consumes battery power and uses data service. While Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot is active, your tablets applications will use your Wireless Providers data service. Roaming while using your tablet as a mobile hotspot will incur extra data charges. Turning Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot On or Off 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch More settings Tethering and portable hotspot Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. 2. Touch Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot OFF and follow the prompts to turn Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot On, or touch Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Hotspot Off. to turn Portable Wi-Fi ON Note: Using your tablet as a mobile hotspot consumes battery power and uses data service. While Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot is active, your tablets applications will use your Wireless Providers data service. Roaming while using your tablet as a mobile hotspot will incur extra data charges. Settings 175 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Allowed Devices List Control whether devices connect to your Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot with the Allowed devices list. After you add devices to the list, they can scan for your device and connect using your devices Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID) and password. Note: Using your tablet as a mobile hotspot consumes battery power and uses data service. While the Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot is active, your tablets applications will use your Wireless Providers data service. Roaming while using your tablet as a mobile hotspot will incur extra data charges. 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch More settings Tethering and portable hotspot Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. The Portable Wi-Fi hotspot screen appears. 2. Touch Allowed devices Add, then enter the other devices Device name and MAC address. 3. Touch OK to add the device to the Allowed devices list. Tip: For information about connecting to your Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot, see Connecting a Device via Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot on page 127. 176 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch More settings Tethering and portable hotspot Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. The Portable Wi-Fi hotspot screen appears. 2. Touch Configure to access the following options:

Network SSID: View and change the name of your Mobile Hotspot.

Hide my device: When enabled, your Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot is not visible to other Wi-Fi devices during a scan. Other devices can still connect to your Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot, but will have to set up the connection manually with your Network SSID and Password.

Security: Choose the security level for your Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot.

Password: If you choose a security level that uses a password, enter the password. By default, the password is your tablets mobile telephone number. (For more information, refer to About device on page 205.)

Show password: Enable to make the Password field visible.

Show advanced options: Enable to access advanced options, including Broadcast channel, to specify the channel your device uses for Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. Touch Menu Timeout settings to set the idle time limit for the Wi-Fi hotspot from Never time-out to 5 minutes 60 minutes. 4. Touch the Wi-Fi hotspot tab, then select Allow all devices or Only allowed devices. Tethering Use Tethering to share your tablets internet connection with a computer that connects to your device via USB cable.

(For more information about connecting computers to your tablet via Tethering, see Tethering on page 127.) 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network, touch More settings Tethering and portable hotspot . The Tethering and portable hotspot screen appears. 2. Connect the computer to the phone with the USB data/

charging cable. 3. Touch USB Tethering to turn tethering On or Off. When On, a check mark appears in the check box. Note: Using Tethering requires a subscription to your Wireless Providers mobile data service. VPN Set up and manage Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). (For more information about using VPNs, see VPN on page 128.) Adding a VPN 1. From the Settings screen, touch Wireless and network More settings VPN. 2. Touch Add VPN network to set up a connection to a VPN, using the following settings:

Name: Enter a name for the VPN connection.

Type: Choose the type of VPN.

Server address: Enter the IP address of the VPN server.

PPP encryption (MPPE): Touch to enable or disable encryption.

Show advanced options: Touch to show more options. Available options depend on the type of VPN you are adding. Note: You must enable at least Pattern security before setting up a VPN. If you have not yet enabled security, youll be prompted to do so the first time you launch VPN settings. Settings 177 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Nearby devices Share files with nearby devices via DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) over Wi-Fi. Note: To use Nearby devices for sharing, you must have set up a connection with another Wi-Fi device that supports DLNA. 3. Under Advanced, touch options to control how content is shared from your device:

Shared contents: Choose the type of content to share, from Videos, Photos, or Music.

Device name: View or modify your devices name.

Access control: Choose whether other devices access your content, from Allow all or Only allowed devices. 1. From the Settings screen, under Wireless and network,

Allowed devices list: Lists Wi-Fi devices allowed to access touch More settings Nearby devices. The Nearby devices screen appears. 2. Touch File sharing OFF DLNA On, or touch File sharing sharing via DLNA Off. to turn file sharing via to turn file ON your device.

Not-allowed devices list: Lists Wi-Fi devices blocked from accessing your device.

Download to: Choose a location to save downloaded content, from USB storage or SD card.

Upload from other devices: Choose how to handle incoming files from other devices, from Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject. 178 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY AllShare Cast AllShare Cast lets your device share the contents of its display with other Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified devices, such as Smart televisions. For more information, refer to AllShare Cast on page 129. Note: To view more information about DLNA certified products visit http://www.dlna.org/home. Kies via Wi-Fi Wi-Fi configuration and usage by Kies Air. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Settings. 2. Touch More settings Kies via Wi-Fi. Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air. Device Blocking Mode When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of incoming calls from people on your allowed list. 1. From the Settings screen, under Device, touch Blocking 2. mode. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode slider to the right to turn it on Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon appears in the Status bar. ON

. 3. To block notifications from appearing, touch Disable notifications. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. 4. To select a specific time interval for this feature to be active, touch Always to disable that option (the check mark disappears from the check box), then select values for the From and To time fields. Settings 179 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. Touch OK to save your settings. Vibration intensity Set the level for vibration to accompany ringtones and notifications. 1. From the Sound menu, under General, touch Vibration intensity. The Vibration intensity menu pops-up. 2. Touch and drag the sliders for:

Incoming call: Set the vibration level for incoming call ringtones.

Notification: Set the vibration level for notifications, such as new messages and event reminders.

Haptic feedback: Set the vibration level vibrations to accompany screen touches. 3. Touch OK to save your settings. Sound From the Settings screen, under Device, touch Sound. The Sound menu appears. Volume Set the system volume level, and set default volume for call ringtones, notifications, and media playback. Note: You can also set System volume from the Home screen by pressing the Volume key Up or Down. 1. From the Sound menu, under General, touch Volume. The Volume menu pops-up. 2. Touch and drag the sliders for:

Music, video, games, and other media: Set the default volume level for audio playback. You can also adjust volume from this default inside the apps.

Ringtone: Set the volume for incoming call ringtones.

Notifications: Set the volume for notifications, such as new messages and event reminders.

System: Set the volume for all other system sounds, such as keytones played for screen touches. You can control whether tones play for screen touches with other sound settings. 180 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Default notifications Choose a default sound to play for notifications, such as for new messages and event reminders. 1. From the Sound menu, under Ringtone and notifications, touch Default notifications. The Default notifications menu pops-up. 2. Touch a sound to select it. When you touch a sound, a sample plays. 3. Touch OK to save your selection. Tip: You can also set songs as ringtones. (For more information, refer to Music Player on page 152.) Keytones Keytones are sounds that play when you touch keys on the keyboard. From the Sound menu, under System, touch Keytones to enable or disable key sounds. When Keytones is enabled, a checkmark appears in the checkbox. Touch sounds Touch sounds play when you touch items on the screen, such as when making a selection. From the Sound menu, under System, touch Touch sounds to enable or disable touch sounds. When Touch sounds is enabled, a checkmark appears in the checkbox. Screen lock sound Screen lock sound plays when you lock or unlock the screen. From the Sound menu, under System, touch Screen lock sound to enable or disable the Screen lock sound. When Screen lock sound is enabled, a checkmark appears in the checkbox. Haptic feedback When turned On, the tablet vibrates to indicate screen touches and other interactions. From the Sound menu, under System, touch Haptic feedback to turn touch vibrations On or Off. Settings 181 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Display From the Settings screen, under Device, touch Display. Brightness Set the default screen brightness. The Display menu appears. 1. From the Display menu, under Screen, touch Wallpaper Customize the background of the Home and Lock screens. 1. From the Display menu, under General, touch Wallpaper. Brightness. 2. Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness, or touch Automatic brightness to allow the tablet to adjust brightness in response to light conditions. 2. Select a screen, from Home screen, Lock screen, or 3. Touch OK to save the setting. Screen timeout Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen touch and the automatic screen timeout (dim and lock). 1. From the Display menu, under Screen, touch Screen timeout. 2. Touch a setting between 15 seconds and 30 minutes to select it. Tip: The longer settings consume more battery power. Home and Lock screens. 3. Select a source for wallpaper, from Gallery, Live wallpaper, or Wallpapers. 4. Follow the prompts to set the picture or wallpaper. Note: You can also set Wallpaper by touching and holding on the Home screen, then touching Set wallpaper. Screen mode Select from several different screen color balance and contrast modes. 1. From the Display menu, under Screen, touch Screen mode. 2. Touch Dynamic, Standard, or Movie then touch OK. 182 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Smart stay When On, the Smart stay feature prevents screen timeout, if you are using your tablet. For example, the tablet uses the front camera to identify your eyes, and keeps the screen bright for continued viewing. From the Display menu, under General, touch Smart stay to turn the feature On or Off. Font style Set the font for screen displays. 1. From the Display menu, under Font, touch Font style. 2. Select a font, or touch Get fonts online to browse and download a new font. Font size Set the font size for screen displays. 1. From the Display menu, under Font, touch Font size. 2. Select a font size (Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge). Quick launch Set function or app launched by the multi-functional soft key. 1. From the Display menu, under More settings, touch Quick launch. 2. Select a new function or app by touching None, Screen capture, Applications, Search, or Camera. Settings 183 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Available space: Shows the total device memory available for use.

SD card: View usage for, and manage, storage space on an optional memory card. Total space: Shows the total card memory. Available space: Shows the total card memory available for use. Unmount SD card: Deactivates the memory card so that you can safely remove it or format it. (For more information, see Installing and Removing a Memory Card on page 133) Format SD card: Deletes all data from the memory card, including music, videos, and photos. (For more information, see Formatting a Memory Card on page 133.) Storage Manage the use of memory resources in your tablets Device memory, and on an installed SD card. 1. From the Settings screen, under Device, touch Storage. The Storage screen appears. The following options are available:

Device memory: View usage for, and manage, your tablets internal memory (For detailed information and to manage storage in use, touch any item except Total space or Available space.):

Total space: Shows the total installed device memory. Applications: Shows the total device memory currently used to store applications. Pictures, videos: Shows the total device memory currently used to store pictures and videos. Audio (music, ringtones, podcasts, etc.): Shows the total device memory currently used to store music files, ringtones, and so on.) Miscellaneous files: Shows the total device memory currently used to store various application data and system data files. 184 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Power saving mode Configure Power saving settings to conserve battery power. 1. From the Settings screen, under Device, touch Power saving mode. The Power saving mode screen appears. 2. Touch Power saving mode ON/OFF slider to enable or disable the option:

Touch Power saving mode saving. OFF to enable Power 3. Under Power saving mode settings, Touch the following options to enable or disable them. (When an option is enabled, a check mark appears in its check box.):

CPU power saving: When enabled, the tablets maximum performance is limited. This does not affect normal usage, such as browsing and video playback.

Screen power saving: When enabled, the screen uses reduced frame refresh rate and lower brightness.

Turn off haptic feedback: When enabled, no vibration plays

Touch Power saving mode ON to disable Power when you touch the screen. saving. Power saving mode must be enabled (

configure the Power saving mode settings. ON

) to 4. Under Power saving tips, touch Learn about power saving to read information about Power saving options. Settings 185 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Battery See how much battery power is being used by device activities. 1. From the Settings screen, under Device, touch Battery. The Battery screen appears. 2. View battery usage for applications and services currently running. The battery level displays in percentage. The amount of time the battery was used also displays. Battery usage displays in percentages per application. 3. Touch Screen, Internet, Android OS, Android System, or any other listed feature or application to view how it is affecting battery use. Note: Other applications that affect battery use may be running. Application manager You can download and install applications from the Google Play Store, or create applications using the Android SDK

(Software Development Kit) and install them on your tablet. Use Application manager to manage applications on your tablet. Warning! Because this device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk. 1. From the Settings screen, under Device, touch Application manager. The Application manager screen appears. 2. Touch Downloaded, Running, or All to list the statuses of applications and services. The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows used and free Device memory. The graph at the bottom of the Running tab shows used and free RAM. 186 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. Touch an app or service to display the App info or Active app screen which provides more detailed storage usage information, and lets you Stop/Force stop or Uninstall/Report and app or service. For Downloaded apps, you can also Clear data, Clear cache, and/or Clear defaults. Personal Location services Location services control your device's use of GPS signals. Some apps may require one or more location services be turned On for full app functionality. GPS signals may be affected by your surroundings, including:

Buildings

Tunnels or underground structures

Weather conditions

High-voltage or electromagnetic fields

Tinted windows 1. From the Settings screen, under Personal, touch Locations services. The Location services screen appears. 2. Touch the following options to enable/disable them.

(When an option is enabled, a check mark appears in its check box.):

Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.

Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint your location. Settings 187 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Note: Use GPS satellites must be enabled to use some applications. You can also enable or disable GPS from the Notifications panel. (For more information, refer to Notifications on page 35.) Important! By selecting Use GPS satellites, you are allowing access to all location information by any third party through web access or any software or peripheral components you choose to install, download, add, or attach to the device or any other means.

Location and Google search: allows Google to use your location data for improved search results and other services. Note: Google location services must be enabled to use some applications. Important! By selecting Location and Google search, you are allowing Googles location service to collect anonymous location data. Some data may be stored on your device. Collection may occur even when n o apps are running. 188 Lock screen Choose settings for locking and unlocking your tablets screen. For more information about using the lock and unlock features, see Securing Your Device on page 17. From the Security screen, under Screen security, touch the following options to access additional options:

Screen lock: Touch one of the following options to select it as your custom screen lock/unlock method:

Swipe: When enabled, you unlock the tablet by swiping your finger across the screen. This is the default screen lock, and offers no security. Motion: When enabled, you unlock the tablet by touching and holding on the screen and tilting the tablet forward. Touch the option for more information and a demonstration of the motion. This screen lock offers no security. Face unlock: When enabled, you unlock the tablet by looking at the screen. This option offers low security, because someone who looks similar to you could unlock your tablet. Touch the option for more information, and to set up Face unlock. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Face and voice: When enabled, you unlock the tablet by looking at the screen and speaking. This option offers low security, because someone who looks and/or sounds similar to you could unlock your tablet. Touch the option for more information, and to set up Face unlock. Pattern: When enabled, you draw a pattern, which you create, on the screen to unlock the tablet. Touch the option, then follow the prompts to create or change your screen unlock pattern. PIN: When enabled, you enter a numeric PIN (Personal Identification Number), which you create, to unlock the tablet. Password: When enabled, you enter an alphanumeric password, which you create, to unlock the tablet. None: Disable all custom screen lock settings, to use the default swipe unlock screen.

Lock screen options: Touch this option and the Lock screen options screen appears with the following additional options available:

Note: The Lock screen options are only available when the Screen lock option is set to Swipe or Motion. Shortcuts: When enabled, application shortcuts appear on the lock screen. Swipe an icon to launch the associated application. Touch Shortcuts to enable lock screen shortcuts. Touch Shortcuts to disable lock screen shortcuts. Touch Shortcuts to add/remove lock screen shortcuts. Information ticker: When enabled, a news or stock OFF ON to enable the lock OFF information ticker appears on the lock screen. Touch Information ticker screen information ticker. Touch Information ticker screen information ticker. Touch Information ticker to configure the lock screen information ticker. ON to disable the lock Clock: Touch this option to enable/disable a clock display on the lock screen. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. Settings 189 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Dual clock: When enabled, a clock displaying two time zones OFF to enable the lock appears on the lock screen. Touch Information ticker screen dual clock. Touch Information ticker screen dual clock. Touch Information ticker to configure the lock screen dual clock. to disable the lock ON Weather: When enabled, weather information for your current OFF to enable the lock location appears on the lock screen. Touch Information ticker screen weather display. Touch Information ticker screen weather display. Touch Information ticker to configure the lock screen weather display. to disable the lock ON Ripple effect: Touch this option to enable/disable showing a ripple effect on the lock screen, provided the lock screen wallpaper is not live. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. 190 Help text: Touch this option to enable/disable showing text explanations of lock screen features. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. Wake up in lock screen: Touch this option to enable/disable unlocking your tablet by saying the S Voice wake-up command. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box. (For more information about S Voice, see S Voice on page 160.) Set wake-up command: Touch this option and to configure the S Voice wake-up command functions. (For more information about S Voice, see S Voice on page 160.)

Popup Note on lock screen: Touch this option to enable/disable accessing the Popup Note feature from your lock screen by using the S Pen.

Owner information: Touch this option to enter text you want displayed on the Lock screen. The following options are available:

Show owner info on lock screen: When enabled, displays text you enter in the text box on the Lock screen. Enter text to display on lock screen: In this box, enter text you want displayed on the lock screen. (For more information about entering text, see Entering Text on page 47.) DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Security From the Settings screen, under Personal, touch Security. The Security screen appears. Encryption As a security measure, you can encrypt the contents of your tablet or an installed memory card, and require a password each time you turn on the tablet or access the memory card. Encryption may take an hour or more to complete. Start with a charged battery, and attach the charger until encryption is complete. Loss of power or other interruption may cause the loss of some or all data. Once your information is encrypted you will be prompted to enter your decryption password each time you turn your tablet on. From the Security screen, under Encryption, touch the following options to encrypt your information:

Encrypt device: Touch this option to encrypt accounts, settings, downloaded applications and data, media files, and more under a password you specify.

Encrypt external SD card: Touch this option to encrypt selected information stored on a microSD memory card under a password you specify. The following additional Encryption settings are available:

Encrypt: When enabled, new files on the memory card will be encrypted as they are added. Full encryption: When enabled, all files on the memory card will be encrypted. Exclude multimedia files: When enabled, multimedia files on the memory card will not be encrypted. Passwords When enabled, password characters display briefly as you enter them. From the Security screen, under Passwords, touch the following option to enable/disable it: (When the option is enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Make passwords visible: When enabled, briefly displays password characters as you enter them. Settings 191 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Device administration View or disable device administrators. Some applications, such as corporate Email, may require you allow access to your device by device administrators in certain circumstances, such as if your tablet is lost or stolen. Some features a device administrator might control include:

Setting the number of failed password attempts before the tablet is restored to factory settings.

Automatically locking the tablet.

Restoring factory settings on the tablet. From the Security screen, under Device administration, touch the following options to enable/disable them:

(When an option is enabled, a check mark appears in its check box.)

Device administrators: View, add, or remove device administrators.

Unknown sources: When enabled, you can install applications from sources other than Google Play. Warning! Because this device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk. Credential storage You can install credentials with an application, from device storage, or from an installed memory card, and use the Credential storage settings to allow applications to access the secure certificates and other credentials. From the Security screen, under Credential storage, touch the following options to enable/disable them.

(When an option is enabled, a check mark appears in its check box.):

Trusted credentials: View, enable, or disable trusted CA certificates.

Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card. Note: You must have installed a memory card containing encrypted certificates to use this feature. 192 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Clear credentials: Clear stored credentials and reset the password. Note: This option cannot be changed. Note: This setting is active only if you have installed security credentials. Language and input From the Settings screen, under Personal, touch Language and input. The Language and input screen appears. Language Select the language used in your tablets screens. From the Language and input screen, touch Language to select the language used in your tablets screens. Keyboards and input methods Configure text entry options to your preferences. From the Language and input screen, under Keyboards and input methods, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it. (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.):

Default: Review the default method for manually entering text.

Google voice typing: Lets you vocally dictate the text entered beside Google voice typing to configure into a field. Touch the following options:

Select input languages: Select languages for Google voice typing. Select Automatic to use the Default language exclusively, or choose other language(s). Block offensive words: When enabled, words many people find offensive are not shown in results of Google voice searches. Offensive words are replaced in results with a placeholder

(####).

Samsung keyboard: Touch beside Samsung keypad to configure the following options:

Note: This option cannot be disabled. Portrait keyboard types: Choose the default keypad when the screen is in portrait mode, from Qwerty or 3x4 keyboard (similar to a phone keypad). Input language: Select languages for the Samsung keyboard. Settings 193 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Tip: When you have more than one language selected, you can slide your finger on the space bar while entering text to switch languages. Predictive text: When enabled, T9 suggests words matching ON OFF to enable T9 to disable your text entries and optionally, complete common words automatically. Touch Predictive text predictive text, touch Predictive text T9 predictive text. Touch Predictive text to configure the following options:

Word completion: When enabled, T9 automatically completes words matching your key touches. Word completion point: Choose the number of letters T9 uses to predict words for automatic completion. Spell correction: Enable for automatic spelling check and correction. Next word prediction: When enabled, the system predicts the next word based on common usage patterns. Auto-append: When enabled, the most common predicted word is automatically added to your text. Auto-substitution: When enabled, T9 automatically replaces words you enter with words from the auto substitution list. 194 Regional correction: When enabled, T9 automatically changes the spelling of words based on norms for your default language. Recapture: When enabled, T9 re-displays matching words when you make corrections to a word inserted automatically. My word list: Add words to your T9 predictive text dictionary. Auto substitution list: Manage the list of words T9 uses for auto-substitution (Auto-substitution setting must be enabled). Continuous input: When enabled, you can sweep your finger over keypad letters to enter words. When you lift your finger, a word matching your sweep is entered automatically. Available when Predictive text is turned On. Handwriting: When enabled, Samsung keyboard recognizes ON to enable T9 predictive text, to disable T9 predictive text. on-screen tracing of words. Touch Handwriting OFF touch Handwriting Touch Handwriting to configure the following options:

Recognition type: Select Stroke recognition or Complete recognition. Recognition time: Select 100 ms, 300 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, or 2000 ms. Pen thickness: Select 1 pixel, 3 pixels, 5 pixels, 7 pixels, or 9 pixels. Pen color: Select Black, Red, Blue, Green, or Brown. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Gesture guide: Shows gestures for text editing functions. Tutorial: Shows explanation of how to write by hand so that the tablet will accept your input. About: Lists the Build, DHWR, and DioWord+ release versions. Voice input: When enabled, the voice input key appears on the keyboard. Auto-capitalization: When enabled, T9 automatically capitalizes words in your text based on common usage, such as at the beginning of sentences. Auto-punctuate: When enabled, a period and space are automatically entered to end a sentence, when you tap the space bar twice. Character preview: When enabled, characters available on the key you touch display briefly as you enter text. Key-tap vibration: When enabled, a vibration plays for your key touches. Key-tap sound: When enabled, a sound plays for your key touches. Tutorial: View help for using T9 predictive text. Reset settings: Touch to reset Samsung keyboard settings to the defaults, except for My word list and the Auto substitution list.

Swype: Touch beside Swype to configure the following options:

How to Swype: View an on-screen manual for Swype. Preferences: The following settings are available:

Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter text using the keypad. Sound on keypresses: turns on sounds generated by the Swype application. Show helpful tips: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help. Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words. When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word. Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence. Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path. Pop-up on keypress: once enabled, displays a character above an on-screen key while typing. Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in your text string based on your current text entries. Note: If incorrect words are being entered as you type, disabled this feature. Settings 195 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Reset Swypes dictionary: once enabled, deletes any words you have added to Swypes dictionary. Version: displays the software version information. Language Options: Activate and select the current text input language. Default language is US English. Swype Connect: Activate social media personalization and configure data settings. Facebook: allows you to log into your current Facebook account from where contact names are added to your Swpes personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text fields. Helps recognize familiar names. Twitter: allows you to sing into your existing Twitter account from where names and words are added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names and words. Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from where existing contact information is added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names. Contribute data usage: when enabled, allows the Nuance application to collect usage data for better word predictions. Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by the Swype application so it can receive program updates, language downloads, and other related features via your existing data connection. Personal dictionary: Access and manage your personal dictionary. 196 Updates: Update Swype if new software is available. Speech From the Language and input screen, under Speech, the following options are available:

Voice search: Configure how Voice search reacts to your speech. Language: Choose a language for voice searching. SafeSearch: Set the sensitivity for filtering of explicit images from the results of your Google voice searches (Off, Moderate, or Strict). Block offensive words: When enabled, words many people find offensive are not shown in results of Google voice searches. Offensive words are replaced in results with a placeholder

(####). Personalized recognition: Train Voice search to more accurately recognize your voice. Google Account dashboard: Manage data collected under your Google account. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Text-to-speech output: Provides audible readout of text, for example, the contents of text messages, and the Caller ID for incoming calls. Preferred TTS engine: Select Google Text-to-speech Engine, or Samsung TTS. General:

Speech rate: Choose a rate at which text readouts are spoken. Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis. Driving mode: When enabled, incoming calls and new notifications are read out automatically. Touch Driving mode to enable Driving mode. Touch Driving mode to disable Driving mode. Touch Driving mode to choose items to be read out when Driving mode is enabled (Incoming call, Message, New emails, New voicemail, Alarm, Schedule, and/or Unlock screen). OFF ON Mouse/trackpad Customize the response of your screen swipes. From the Language and input screen, under Mouse/

trackpad, touch Pointer speed, then touch and drag along the scale to set the pointer speed. Back up and reset Set options for backing up your information and resetting your device. From the Settings screen, under Personal, touch Backup and reset. The Backup and reset screen appears. Backup and restore From the Backup and reset screen, under Backup and restore, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Back up my data: Backs up app data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other tablet settings to Google servers.

Backup account: Select or set-up a Google account your tablet will use to backup your app data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other tablet settings.

Automatic restore: Automatically restore app data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other tablet settings from your automatic backup. Settings 197 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Personal data Factory data reset Use Factory data reset to return all settings to the defaults, and remove all data from the tablet. From the Backup and reset screen, under Personal data, touch Factory data reset to return all settings to the defaults, and remove all data from the tablet. Important! Settings and data erased in a Factory data reset cannot be recovered. To save your settings, you can use Back up my data settings before a reset. 198 Accounts Set up and manage accounts, including your Samsung, Google, Backup Assistant Plus, and social networking accounts. From the Settings screen, under Personal, touch Accounts and sync. The Accounts and sync screen appears. The following options are available:

Accounts and sync: When enabled, all accounts sync data at any time, automatically. Touch Accounts and sync OFF synchronization of all accounts. Touch Accounts and sync synchronization of all accounts. to enable automatic ON to disable automatic

Accounts list: Touch an account and its Sync settings screen appears with the following options. Common / General settings: When available, lets you change the configuration of the selected account. Device backup: When available, lets you select what data is backed up to the selected account for later restoration after a Factory data reset. (For more information, refer to Factory data reset on page 198.) DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Data and synchronization: View, enable, and disable individual synchronization items. Sync now: Touch to sync the selected account. Remove account: Touch to remove the selected account.

Sync all: Touch to synchronize all accounts.

Add account: Touch to launch the Add account screen, select the desired account type, follow the prompts to define the account to your tablet. System Motion Motion lets you control a number of your tablets functions by moving your hand or finger across the screen in a particular pattern or by moving the tablet itself in a particular way. Note: For more information about using Motion, see Using Motions on page 34. 1. From the Settings screen, under Device, touch Motion. The Motion screen appears. 2. Touch Motion activation to enable/disable your tablets ability to recognize active gestures. (When this option is enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.) Settings 199 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. Configure motion options by touching the OFF setting to enable them, or touching the setting to disable them:

Tilt to zoom: When enabled, tilting the tablet while in Gallery or ON Internet causes the screen to zoom in or out.

Pan to move icon: When enabled, moving the tablet in a panning motion (side-to-side) moves a highlighted icon to a new location on the Home screen.

Pan to browse images: When enabled, moving the tablet in a panning motion while viewing an image moves focus around in the image. S Pen 200 Accessory Configure your tablets behavior when you connect it to optional accessories (not included). From the Settings screen, under System, touch Accessory. The Accessory screen appears. Dock Configure your tablets behavior when it is connected to an optional Dock (not included). From the Accessory screen, under Dock, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Dock sound: When enabled, a sound plays when you insert and remove the tablet from the Dock.

Audio output mode: When enabled, audio plays through the Dock speakers when the tablet is docked.

Desk home screen display: When enabled, displays a special screen when the tablet is docked. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY HDMI Configure your tablets behavior when you connect it to an HD television or an amplifier using an optional HDTV Adapter

(not included). From the Accessory screen, under HDMI, the following option is available:

Audio output: Select the quality of sound to be produced

(Stereo or Surround). Date and time By default, your tablet receives date and time information from the wireless network. When you are outside network coverage, you may want to set date and time information manually using the Date & time settings. 1. From the Home screen, touch Menu, then select Settings Date and time. 2. Touch a setting to configure:

Automatic date and time: When enabled, the tablet takes date and time updates from the wireless network (disables Set date, Set time, and Select time zone).

Set date: Enter the current date (only available when Automatic date and time is disabled).

Set time: Enter the current time (only available when Automatic date and time is disabled).

Automatic time zone: When enabled, the tablet uses the network-provided time zone.

Select time zone: Choose your local time zone (only available when Automatic date and time is disabled).

Use 24-hour format: Set the format for time displays.

Select date format: Set the format for date displays. Settings 201 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Accessibility Your tablet offers features to make using it easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use the Accessibility settings to activate these services. From the Settings screen, under System, touch Accessibility. The Accessibility screen appears. System options From the Accessibility screen, under System, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Auto-rotate screen: The screens orientation automatically changes when you rotate the tablet. You can also set Auto rotate on the Quick Settings panel with the Screen rotation setting. (For more information, refer to Quick Settings on page 36.)

Speak passwords: Lets you speak passwords for log-ins.

The power key ends calls: Lets you can end voice calls by pressing Power/Lock.

Accessibility shortcut: Adds an Accessibility settings option to the Device options menu (appears when you press and hold Power/Lock key. This provides quick access to the the Accessibility settings, to make changes as you use the tablet.

Screen timeout: Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen touch and the automatic Screen timeout (dim and lock). Services option Enable or disable accessibility services. TalkBack From the Accessibility screen, under Services, touch the following option:

TalkBack: When enabled in the TalkBack screen, recites menu options, application titles, contacts, and other items when scrolling and making selections, according to the Settings values you select. 202 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Vision options Mobility option From the Accessibility screen, under Vision, touch the From the Accessibility screen, under Mobility, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Font size: Set the font size for screen displays (Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, Huge).

Negative colors: Reverses the colors on the screen.

Text-to-speech output:

Enhance web accessibility:

Hearing options From the Accessibility screen, under Hearing, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Mono audio: Delivers monophonic sound to support listening with a wired or Bluetooth headset with one earphone.

Turn off all sounds: Disables all sounds, including the voice portion of calls. following option:

Tap and hold delay: Select the length of time the tablet considers a screen touch before interpreting a touch as touch-

and-hold (Short, Medium, Long). Developer options Use the Developer options to set options for Android application development and testing. 1. From the Settings screen, under System, touch Developer options. 2. From the Developer options screen, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it:

(When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Desktop backup password:

Stay awake:

Protect SD card:

Settings 203 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 3. From the Developer options screen, under Debugging, 5. From the Developer options screen, under Drawing, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

USB debugging: When enabled, allows debugging when the device is attached to a PC by a USB cable.

Allow mock locations: Used by developers when developing location-based applications.

Select app to be debugged:

Wait for debugged:

4. From the Developer options screen, under Input, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen.

Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched on the screen. touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Show layout boundaries:

Show GPU view updates:

Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they update.

Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation

(ranges from off to 10x).

Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for transitioning when using animation (ranges from Off to 10x).

Animator duration scale:

Disable hardware overlays:

Force GPU rendering: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications. 204 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY 6. From the Developer options screen, under Monitoring, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Strict mode: The screen flashes when applications perform long operations on the main thread.

Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.

GPU rendering profile:

Enable traces:

7. From the Developer options screen, under Apps, touch the check box next to each of the following options to enable it: (When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.)

Do not keep activities: Destroys every activity as soon as the application is closed.

Limit background processes: Set the number of processes that can run in background. Options are: Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4 processes at most.

Show all ANRs: Displays a prompt when applications running in background are not responding. About device View information about your tablet, including status, legal information, hardware and software versions, and a tutorial. 1. From the Settings screen, under System, touch About device. 2. Touch options to view details:

Software update: Check availability and install updates.

Status: View Battery status, Battery level, Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state, Roaming, Mobile network state, My phone number, MIN, PRL version, MEID, IMEI, ICCID, IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Up time, and Device status.

Legal information: Display open source licenses, configure license settings, including your DivX VOD registration, and Google info.

Model number: View your tablets model number.

Android version: View the firmware version of your tablet.

Baseband version: View the baseband version of your tablet.

Kernel version: View the kernel version of your tablet.

Build number: View the build number of your tablet.

Hardware version: View the hardware version of your tablet. Settings 205 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Software Update Software Update lets your tablet connect to the network and download any new device software directly to your tablet. The tablet automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option. 1. From the Settings screen, under System, touch About device Software update. A Disclaimer screen appears. 2. To proceed to Software Update, touch Confirm. Your device registers itself with your Wireless Providers Software Update service, connects with your Wireless Providers server, and scans for software updates. 3. At the Software update prompt, touch OK to continue. 4. The tablet automatically updates the software (if available), otherwise, when the Current software is up to date prompt is displayed, touch OK. 5. When updating software, once the update file is downloaded, you can delay the update on the start screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If you want to resume the update before the selected time, touch Continue update. 206 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 10: Health and Safety Information This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your Galaxy Tab. The terms GALAXY or mobile device are used in this section to refer to your Galaxy Tab. Read this information before using your mobile device. Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals Although GALAXY is not a cell phone, it can operate on the same network as cell phones and can use the same Radio Frequency (RF) signals to communicate with the network as a cell phone. Therefore, although the following information refers specifically to RF exposure from wireless phones, it may apply similarly to GALAXY when it is being used on a cell phone network. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the following information:

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems. Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems. The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects

(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Health and Safety Information 207 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy. Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material. The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy, including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies. While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat. 208 Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems?

The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed. The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge. Some of these studies are described below. Interphone Study Interphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls. Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than hour per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data. Additional information about Interphone can be found at http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf. Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field. International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users

(COSMOS) The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html. Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence

(MOBI-KIDS) MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-

center study involving 14 European and non-European countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/

view.php?ID=39. Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at http://seer.cancer.gov/. Health and Safety Information 209 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Cell Phone Industry Actions Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:

Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;

Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user; and

Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and human health concerns. The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public. 210 Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.

Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone. Hands-Free Kits Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones. Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving. Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike hands-free kits, these so-called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. Children and Cell Phones The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well.

Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone. Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations (updated 10/1/2010):

FCC RF Safety Program:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/. Health and Safety Information 211 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.

(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.

World Health Organization (WHO):

http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.

International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:

http://www.icnirp.de.

Health Protection Agency:

http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.

US Food and Drug Administration:

http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/

RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/

HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm. 212 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information Your wireless mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government. These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations: the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy. The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless devices to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the mobile device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the mobile device while operating can be well below the maximum reported value. This is because the mobile device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output of the mobile device. Before a new model mobile device is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model mobile device are performed in positions and locations

(e.g. at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For body-worn operation, this mobile device has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1.5 cm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. This tablet has a FCC ID number:

A3LSCHI925U [Model Number: SCH-I925U] and the specific SAR levels for this tablet can be found at the following FCC website:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/. The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsungs website:

http://www.samsung.com/sar. ****************

SAR information on this and other model mobile devices can be accessed online on the FCC's website through http://

transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that pertains to a particular model mobile device, this site uses the mobile device FCC ID number, which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the mobile device. Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular mobile device, follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular mobile device. Additional SAR information can also be Health and Safety Information 213 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY obtained at http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-

cellular-telephones. FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be 214 determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Smart Practices While Driving On the Road - Off the Tablet The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle. Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to passengers, or using a mobile device -

unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions. Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in certain areas. Before using your device to chat with friends, consider your circumstances. Let the chat wait when driving conditions require. Remember, driving comes first, nothing else!

If you consider a chat necessary and appropriate, follow these tips:

Use a hands-free device;

Secure your mobile device within easy reach;

Chat when you are not moving;

Plan chats when your car will be stationary;

Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;

Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the chat if necessary;

Do not take notes or look up information while driving;

Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile:

Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines, penalties, or other damages. Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the drivers clear view of the street and traffic. Never use wireless data services such as Web browsing or e-mail while operating a vehicle. Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games while operating a vehicle. For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org. Battery Use and Safety The battery in GALAXY is not intended to be replaced by the consumer. If you believe the battery is damaged or needs to be replaced, take the GALAXY to a service center for inspection and replacement. Health and Safety Information 215 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Do not let the GALAXY or battery come in contact with liquids. Liquids can get into the GALAXYs circuits, leading to corrosion. Even when the GALAXY appears to be dry and appears to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the GALAXY and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working properly.

Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive heating can damage the GALAXY or the battery and could cause the GALAXY or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your GALAXY in your car in high temperatures.

Do not dispose of the GALAXY or the battery in a fire. The GALAXY or the battery may explode when overheated.

Avoid dropping the GALAXY. Dropping the GALAXY, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the GALAXY. If you suspect damage to the GALAXY or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.

Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way. 216 Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are specifically designed for your GALAXY. WARNING!

Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the GALAXY caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.

Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.

Misuse or use of incompatible batteries and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries, damages to your mobile device, or other serious hazard. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories. Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly. For more information about recycling your GALAXY, go to:

http://mobile.samsungusa.com/recycling/index.jsp or call 1-800-822-8837 for more information. To find the nearest recycling location, go to:

www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect or call 1-877-278-0799. Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode. UL Certified Travel Charger The Travel Charger for this mobile device has met applicable UL safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions per UL guidelines:

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET. THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION. Health and Safety Information 217 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Display / Touch-Screen Please note the following information when using your mobile device:

WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more information, please refer to the Standard Limited Warranty. 218 GPS GALAXY can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance of location-based technology on your mobile device. Your Location Location-based information includes information that can be used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use applications that require location-based information

(e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit location-based information. The location-based information may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties providing services. Navigation Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY time. In some areas, complete information may not be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them. All users should pay attention to road conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs. Emergency Communication GALAXY should not be relied upon for essential communications (medical emergencies, calls to 911, or communications to emergency services). GALAXY is not designed or intended to be used for such communications. Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) services which may be used on GALAXY to make mobile device calls do not support 911 calls and are only intended for talking with friends. Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years:

Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:

Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device. Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0C / 32F or above 45C /

113F. Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing so may cause a fire or explosion. Dust and Dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand. Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft Health and Safety Information 219 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution. Shock or vibration Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Paint Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the devices moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation. Responsible Listening Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss. Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and mobile devices, at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and equipment. You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device:

Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source.

Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately.

Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing. 220 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to.

Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds.

Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is required before you hearing could be affected.

Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.

Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor. You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources:

American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300 Reston, VA 20190 Voice: (800) 222-2336 Email: info@audiology.org Internet:

http://www.audiology.org/Pages/

default.aspx National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive, MSC 2320 Bethesda, MD 20892-2320 Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov Internet:

http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/

Health and Safety Information 221 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington, DC 20201 Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH

(1-800-356-4674) 1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636) Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328 Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov Internet:

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/

default.html 1-888-232-6348 TTY Operating Environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. 222 Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device. Persons who have such devices:

Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;

Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;

Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference;

Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place;

DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device, consult your health care provider. For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-

faqs.html#. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so. Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Health and Safety Information 223 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately, if applicable (if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center. Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the mobile device, or use services that increase your mobile device bill. Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection Association. Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it. Other Important Safety Information

Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device. Faulty service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.

Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment used in your vehicle are securely mounted. 224 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly.

When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset.

Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or accessories.

For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.

Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of network services to the offender, or legal action, or both.

While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes.

Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device immediately.

Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.

Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use

If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft. light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]

Health and Safety Information 225 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Section 11: Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long?

SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC

(SAMSUNG) warrants that SAMSUNG's devices and accessories ("Products") are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date:

Tablet Batteries (Including Internal Batteries) Case 1 Year 1 Year 90 Days Other Tablet Accessories 1 Year What is not covered?

This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of Product by Purchaser. 226 This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;

(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;

(d) equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;

(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;

(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;

(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY or transmission, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG Tablet for which it is specified. What are SAMSUNG's obligations?

During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, without charge to Purchaser, or at SAMSUNG's sole option, refund the purchase price. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing any Product, or may replace Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases will be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. This Limited Warranty is extended to the Purchaser and is not transferable or assignable to any other person or entity. What must you do to obtain warranty service?

To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must return the Product to an authorized Tablet service facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product and the seller's name and address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-800-SAMSUNG. If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product. Purchaser should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service. Warranty Information 227 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY What are the limits on SAMSUNG's liability?

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG'S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT;

LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE;

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 228 SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT. Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state. What is the procedure for resolving disputes?

ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other person's or entity's Product or claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association

(AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty. For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are

$5,000.00 or less (Small Claim), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (Large Claim) shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrators award in any court of competent jurisdiction. Warranty Information 229 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNGs employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Products sale, condition or performance. You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchasers purchase of the Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: Arbitration Opt Out. You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;

(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;

(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found under Settings; (iii) on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchasers purchase of the Product and providing the same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting 230 out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty. Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty. Precautions for Transfer and Disposal If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software. To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsungs Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to Samsungs Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges may apply. Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC 1301 E. Lookout Drive Richardson, Texas 75082 Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357) 2012 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights reserved. No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without notice. [111611]

End User License Agreement for Software IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you

(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung Electronics Co.") for software, owned by Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation

("Software"). Samsung Electronics Co. is a separate company from the company that provides the limited warranty for this mobile device, Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, RETURN THE DEVICE TO THE RETAILER FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung Electronics Co. grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes Warranty Information 231 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original. 2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung Electronics Co. reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties. Samsung Electronics Co. or its suppliers own the title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is licensed, not sold. 3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software

(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation), or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software. 4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you, if any. 232 Samsung Electronics Co. and its affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you. 5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung Electronics Co. may provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung Electronics Co. as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility. 6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software. DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms. 7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. 8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung Electronics Co. if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the Software. 9. Disclaimer of Warranty. ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. 10. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party applications may be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device. Samsung Electronics Co. makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung Electronics Co. has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and agree that Samsung Electronics Co. is not responsible for the availability of such Warranty Information 233 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY applications and is not responsible or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or other materials on or available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its products and services. You agree that Samsung Electronics Co. shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party content, products, or services available on or through any such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of any third-party application is governed by such third party application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will 234 be subject to such third party application provider's privacy policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. 11. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party Applications. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE, TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., IS DOWNLOADED, OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO THE MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. 12. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Warranty Information 235 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS

(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, 11 AND 12) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. 13. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as

"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"

and "commercial software documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19. 236 14. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. 15. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.

(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties.

(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO. ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with any other person's or entity's claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung Electronics Co. its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or

$50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and Samsung Electronics Co. shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung Electronics Co.'s employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung Electronics Co. no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of this device. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the device was purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and

(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;

and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-

987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of Warranty Information 237 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and providing the same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of this license. 16. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co. relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect.

[101212]

238 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Index Numerics 3.5mm Headset Jack 22 A Accessibility settings Accounts services 202 setting up 56 Adobe PDF 157 Airplane mode 174 Alarm Turning Off 138 configuring 138 Android keyboard configuring 48 App Shortcuts 40 Application Bar 33 Applications 134 AllShare Applications settings downloading new 156 allow mock locations 204 USB debugging 204 B C Back button 32 Battery charging 5 indicator 5 installing and removing 5 Battery Use & Safety 215 Blocking Mode 179 On 179 Bluetooth pairing with a device 123 profiles 170 settings 171 turning on or off 123 Quick Controls 120 Browser Settings 117 Browser Camcorder Camera recording video 106 settings 107 settings 103 taking photos 103 Care and Maintenance 219 Children and mobile device 211 Contacts creating 57 display options 60 exporting and importing 63 groups 63 joining 62 linking 62 namecards 62 separating joined 62 setting a photo as contact icon starred contacts 65 updating 59 100 239 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY D Display / Touch-Screen 218 Display settings brightness 182 font style and size 183 screen timeout 182 Do mobile device pose a health hazard?

207 Downloads managing 130 E Email Combined view 70 composing and sending 71 configuring accounts 68 Signals 207 Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) F Facebook Swpe Connect 196 FCC Notice and Cautions 224 Firmware Update 129 240 G Gallery 98 Gmail Gestures sharing photos and video 102 viewing photos and video 99 Browse Image 35 Tilt to Zoom 34 account settings 79 composing and sending 78 Personalize Swype 196 refreshing your account 77 setting up your account 76 Gmail 76 Maps 151 Navigation 154 Play Store 156 Search 149 your account 11 YouTube 163 Google Messenger 84 Google Play 156 Google Voice Typing 55 Google GPS 218 GPS Applications 136 Groups creating 64 H Handwriting 53 Health and Safety Information 207 Home button 32 Home screen 28 adding widgets 41 folders 42 wallpaper 43 I Infrared Blaster 22 Internet browser 112 K Kies 129 via Wi-Fi 179 L Locking and Unlocking unlocking the keypad 17 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY M N Maps 151 Memory Card formatting 133 installing 16 removing 16 Memory settings internal phone storage 184 context-sensitive 33 Messages email 68 Gmail 76 types 68 Menu Messenger 84 Mini App Tray 29, 44 Mobile Hotspot using your phone as a hotspot 126 Mobile networks settings 174 Overview 34 creating a playlist 90 Motions Music Namecards sending 62 Navigation 32 screen 33 status 40 Nearby Devices Notification Panel 35 Notifications 35 O P Operating Environment 222 Other Important Safety Information 224 Pairing with Bluetooth 123 Peel Set up 161 Phone settings Date & time 201 language 193 Photo Editor 109 Photo ID setting 100 Photos Gallery 98 sharing 102 taking 103 Play Store 156 Playlists creating 90 Polaris Office 157 Powering On and Off 9 Q Quick Controls 120 R Reducing Exposure Hands-Free Kits and Other Accessories 210 Remote Smart 161 Responsible Listening 220 Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile device 224 241 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY Smart Remote see Peel 161 Snooze 138 Software Update 206 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information 212 Standard Limited Warranty 226 Status Bar 39 Storage settings 184 Cellular Data 196 Connect 196 Contribute Data Usage 196 Personal Dictionary 196 Preferences 195 Updates 196 Swype S S Pen Functionality 24 Samsung Keyboard entering text 48 Samsung Kies 129 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 217 Screen Capture 140 Securing your device Security locking and unlocking 17 locking and unlocking 17 locking your device 17 credential storage 192 Security settings Settings 168 Shortcuts 40 SIM card installation 8 Installing 8 SIM Cart Port 22 Smart Practices While Driving 214 242 T9 Trace 52 Text changing input method 47 entering 47 input methods 47 Text settings default 193 Google voice typing 193 Samsung keyboard 193 Turning Your Device On and Off 9 Twitter Personalize Swype 196 T U UL Certified Travel Charger 217 Update Available 135 USB connections USB settings as a mass storage device 132 as a mass storage device 132 mass storage device 132 Windows Media Player 132 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY V Videos Gallery 98 recording 106 sharing 102 accessing 128 settings 177 VPN W Warranty Information 226 Widgets 41, 164 Wi-Fi 121 adding a connection manually Direct 63 scanning and connecting 121 settings 169 turning on or off 121 using your phone as a hotspot 126 WiFi (see Wi-Fi) 120 Windows Media Player synchronizing with 132 Bluetooth 122 VPN 128 Wi-Fi 120 Wireless Networking World Clock 162 Y YouTube 163 243 DRAFT FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

 

 

PCTEST ENGINEERING LABORATORY, INC. 7185 Oakland Mills Road, Columbia, MD 21046 USA Tel. +1.410.290.6652 / Fax +1.410.290.6654 http://www.pctestlab.com SAR EVALUATION REPORT Applicant Name:

Samsung Electronics, Co. Ltd. 129, Samsung-ro, Maetan dong, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si Gyeonggi-do 443-742, Korea Date of Testing:

07/21/2014 Test Site/Location:

PCTEST Lab, Columbia, MD, USA Document Serial No.:

0Y1407221432.A3L FCC ID:

A3LSCHI925U APPLICANT:

SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS, CO. LTD. DUT Type:

Application Type:

FCC Rule Part(s):

Model(s):

Permissive Change(s):

Date of Original Certification:

Portable Tablet Computer Class II Permissive Change CFR 2.1093 SCH-I925U Adding 15MHz & 20MHz BWs to LTE B2 & B4 01/24/2013 Equipment Class Band & Mode Tx Frequency PCB PCB LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 1712.5 - 1752.5 MHz 1852.5 - 1907.5 MHz Simultaneous SAR per KDB 690783 D01v01r02:

SAR 1 gm Body

(W/kg) 0.87 0.70 1.59 The table above shows Test Data evaluated for the current test report. Please refer to RF Exposure Technical Report S/N 0Y1211281716-R1.A3L for compliance evaluation. This wireless portable device has been shown to be capable of compliance for localized specific absorption rate (SAR) for uncontrolled environment/general population exposure limits specified in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992 and has been tested in accordance with the measurement procedures specified in Section 1.7 of this report; for North American frequency bands only. I attest to the accuracy of data. All measurements reported herein were performed by me or were made under my supervision and are correct to the best of my knowledge and belief. I assume full responsibility for the completeness of these measurements and vouch for the qualifications of all persons taking them. Test results reported herein relate only to the item(s) tested. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 1 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S 1 DEVICE UNDER TEST ....................................................................................................................3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LTE INFORMATION .........................................................................................................................7 INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................................................................8 DOSIMETRIC ASSESSMENT .........................................................................................................9 RF EXPOSURE LIMITS ................................................................................................................ 10 FCC MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES ........................................................................................ 11 TABLET SAR TESTING PROCEDURES ..................................................................................... 13 RF CONDUCTED POWERS ......................................................................................................... 14 SYSTEM VERIFICATION .............................................................................................................. 30 SAR DATA SUMMARY ................................................................................................................. 31 FCC MULTI-TX AND ANTENNA SAR CONSIDERATIONS ......................................................... 33 SAR MEASUREMENT VARIABILITY ........................................................................................... 40 EQUIPMENT LIST ......................................................................................................................... 41 MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTIES ............................................................................................ 42 CONCLUSION ............................................................................................................................... 43 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................. 44 APPENDIX A:

APPENDIX B:

APPENDIX C:

APPENDIX D:

SAR TEST PLOTS SAR DIPOLE VERIFICATION PLOTS PROBE AND DIPOLE CALIBRATION CERTIFICATES SAR TISSUE SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX E:

SAR SYSTEM VALIDATION APPENDIX F:

SAR TEST SETUP PHOTOGRAPHS APPENDIX G:

SENSOR TRIGGERING DATA SUMMARY FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 2 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 1 D E V I C E U N D E R T E S T 1.1 Device Overview Band & Mode Operating Modes Tx Frequency Cell. CDMA/EVDO AWS CDMA/EVDO PCS CDMA/EVDO LTE Band 12 LTE Band 5 (Cell) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 2.4 GHz WLAN 5.8 GHz WLAN 5.2 GHz WLAN 5.3 GHz WLAN 5.5 GHz WLAN Bluetooth Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 824.70 - 848.31 MHz 1711.25 - 1753.75 MHz 1851.25 - 1908.75 MHz 701.5 - 713.5 MHz 826.5 - 846.5 MHz 1712.5 - 1752.5 MHz 1852.5 - 1907.5 MHz 2412 - 2462 MHz 5745 - 5825 MHz 5180 - 5240 MHz 5260 - 5320 MHz 5500 - 5700 MHz 2402 - 2480 MHz 1.2 Power Reduction for SAR This device uses a sensor for SAR compliance. The sensor is activated when used in close proximity to the users body. The sensor triggers power reduction for all data modes and is only applicable for tablet operations. There is no power reduction mechanism for WIFI/BT modes for SAR purposes. There are no body-worn accessories for this device. Since the device is a full tablet size, the Body SAR was evaluated per FCC KDB Publication 616217 D04v01 for full sized tablets. 1.3 Nominal and Maximum Output Power Specifications This device operates using the following maximum and nominal output power specifications. SAR values were scaled to the maximum allowed power to determine compliance per KDB Publication 447498 D01v05. 1.3.1 Maximum Power:

Mode / Band LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Modulated Average

(dBm) 23.7 23.2 23.6 23.1 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 3 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 1.3.2 Reduced Power Body at 0 mm:

Modulated Average

(dBm) 12.6 12.1 12.5 12.0 Mode / Band LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal 1.4 DUT Antenna Locations 2.4 GHz WLAN/BT 2.4 GHz WLAN/BT 5 GHz WLAN 5 GHz WLAN Tx/Rx Antenna Tx/Rx Antenna Top Edge Top Edge 262 mm 262 mm Cell/AWS/PCS CDMA/EVDO Cell/AWS/PCS CDMA/EVDO LTE Band 2/4/5/12 LTE Band 2/4/5/12 Rx only Antenna Rx only Antenna Left Left Edge Edge m m m m 0 0 8 8 1 1 Cell/AWS/PCS CDMA/EVDO Cell/AWS/PCS CDMA/EVDO LTE Band 2/4/5/12 LTE Band 2/4/5/12 Tx/Rx Antenna Tx/Rx Antenna GPS Rx only Antenna GPS Rx only Antenna 304.9 mm 304.9 mm Right Right Edge Edge Front of Front of Device Device Bottom Edge Bottom Edge Note: Specific antenna dimensions and separation distances are shown in the antenna distance document. Figure 1-1 DUT Antenna Locations FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 4 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 1.5 Simultaneous Transmission Capabilities According to FCC KDB Publication 447498 D05v01, transmitters are considered to be transmitting simultaneously when there is overlapping transmission, with the exception of transmissions during network hand-offs with maximum hand-off duration less than 30 seconds. Possible transmission paths for the DUT are shown in Figure 1-2 and are color-coded to indicate communication modes which share the same path. Modes which share the same transmission path cannot transmit simultaneously with one another. Path 1 CDMA/EVDO LTE Path 2 BT/WIFI Simultaneous Transmission Paths Figure 1-2 This device contains multiple transmitters that may operate simultaneously, and therefore requires a simultaneous transmission analysis according to FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01v05 3) procedures. Simultaneous Transmission Scenarios Table 1-1 No. Capable Transmit Configurations Body FCC KDB 616217 Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 CDMA/EVDO Data + Wifi 2.4 GHz LTE + Wifi 2.4 GHz CDMA/EVDO Data + Wifi 5 GHz LTE + Wifi 5 GHz CDMA/EVDO Data + Bluetooth LTE + Bluetooth Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 2G/3G Hotspot or Wifi Direct 4G Hotspot or Wifi Direct Wifi Direct Wifi Direct FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 5 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 1.6 SAR Test Exclusions Applied

(A) WIFI/BT 2.4 GHz WLAN and 5 GHz WLAN and Bluetooth share the same antenna path and cannot transmit simultaneously. This report evaluates SAR compliance for LTE Band 2 and LTE 4. Please refer to RF exposure Technical Report 0Y1211281716-R1.A3L for original compliance report containing data for other main antenna and WLAN modes. No changes were made to any other mode or band.

(B) Licensed Transmitter(s) LTE SAR for the higher modulations and lower bandwidths were not tested since the maximum average output power of all required channels and configurations was not more than 0.5 dB higher than the highest bandwidth; and the reported LTE SAR for the highest bandwidth was less than 1.45 W/kg for all configurations according to FCC KDB 941225 D05v02. 1.7 Guidance Applied FCC KDB Publication 941225 D01-D06 (4G and Hotspot) FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01v05 (General SAR Guidance) FCC KDB Publication 865664 D01-D02 (SAR Measurements up to 6 GHz) FCC KDB Publication 616217 D04v01 (SAR for Laptops and Tablets) 1.8 Device Serial Numbers Several samples with identical hardware were used to support SAR testing. The manufacturer has confirmed that the device(s) tested have the same physical, mechanical and thermal characteristics and are within operational tolerances expected for production units. LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) Max Power Serial Number Reduced Power Number 4689-0543 4689-0538 4689-0542 4689-0542 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 6 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 2 L T E I N F O R M AT I O N LTE Information FCC ID Form Factor Frequency Range of each LTE transmission band Channel Bandwidths Channel Numbers and Frequencies (MHz) LTE Band 4 (AWS): 5 MHz LTE Band 4 (AWS): 10 MHz LTE Band 4 (AWS): 15 MHz LTE Band 4 (AWS): 20 MHz LTE Band 2 (PCS): 5 MHz LTE Band 2 (PCS): 10 MHz LTE Band 2 (PCS): 15 MHz LTE Band 2 (PCS): 20 MHz UE Category Modulations Supported in UL LTE MPR Permanently implemented per 3GPP TS 36.101 section 6.2.3~6.2.5? (manufacturer attestation to be provided) A-MPR (Additional MPR) disabled for SAR Testing?

A3LSCHI925U Portable Tablet Computer LTE Band 4 (AWS) (1712.5 - 1752.5 MHz) LTE Band 2 (PCS) (1852.5 - 1907.5 MHz) LTE Band 4 (AWS): 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz LTE Band 2 (PCS): 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz Low 1712.5 (19975) 1715 (20000) 1717.5 (20025) 1720 (20050) 1852.5 (18625) 1855 (18650) 1857.5 (18675) 1860 (18700) Mid 1732.5 (20175) 1732.5 (20175) 1732.5 (20175) 1732.5 (20175) 1880 (18900) 1880 (18900) 1880 (18900) 1880 (18900) 3 QPSK, 16QAM High 1752.5 (20375) 1750 (20350) 1747.5 (20325) 1745 (20300) 1907.5 (19175) 1905 (19150) 1902.5 (19125) 1900 (19100) YES YES FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 7 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 3 I N T R O D U C T I O N The FCC and Industry Canada have adopted the guidelines for evaluating the environmental effects of radio frequency (RF) radiation in ET Docket 93-62 on Aug. 6, 1996 and Health Canada Safety Code 6 to protect the public and workers from the potential hazards of RF emissions due to FCC-regulated portable devices. [1]

The safety limits used for the environmental evaluation measurements are based on the criteria published by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for localized specific absorption rate (SAR) in IEEE/ANSI C95.1-1992 Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz [3] and Health Canada RF Exposure Guidelines Safety Code 6

[24]. The measurement procedure described in IEEE/ANSI C95.3-2002 Recommended Practice for the Measurement of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave [4] is used for guidance in measuring the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) due to the RF radiation exposure from the Equipment Under Test (EUT). These criteria for SAR evaluation are similar to those recommended by the International Committee for Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) in Biological Effects and Exposure Criteria for Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields, Report No. Vol 74. SAR is a measure of the rate of energy absorption due to exposure to an RF transmitting source. SAR values have been related to threshold levels for potential biological hazards. 3.1 SAR Definition Specific Absorption Rate is defined as the time derivative (rate) of the incremental energy (dU) absorbed by (dissipated in) an incremental mass (dm) contained in a volume element (dV) of a given density (). It is also defined as the rate of RF energy absorption per unit mass at a point in an absorbing body (see Equation 3-1). Equation 3-1 SAR Mathematical Equation dU dv dU dm

=

d dt d dt

=

SAR SAR is expressed in units of Watts per Kilogram (W/kg). SAR

=

2E where:

= conductivity of the tissue-simulating material (S/m) E = Total RMS electric field strength (V/m)

= mass density of the tissue-simulating material (kg/m3) NOTE: The primary factors that control rate of energy absorption were found to be the wavelength of the incident field in relation to the dimensions and geometry of the irradiated organism, the orientation of the organism in relation to the polarity of field vectors, the presence of reflecting surfaces, and whether conductive contact is made by the organism with a ground plane.[6]

FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 8 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 4 D O S I M E T R I C A S S E S S M E N T 4.1 Measurement Procedure The evaluation was performed using the following procedure:

1. Figure 4-1 Sample SAR Area Scan The SAR distribution at the exposed side of the head or body was measured at a distance no greater than 5.0 mm from the inner surface of the shell. The area covered the entire dimension of the device-head and body interface and the horizontal grid resolution was determined per FCC KDB Publication 865664 D01v01 (See Table 4-1). The point SAR measurement was taken at the maximum SAR region determined from Step 1 to enable the monitoring of SAR fluctuations/drifts during the 1g/10g cube evaluation. SAR at this fixed point was measured and used as a reference value. Based on the area scan data, the peak of the region with maximum SAR was determined by spline interpolation. Around this point, a volume was assessed according to the measurement resolution and volume size requirements of FCC KDB Publication 865664 D01v01 (See Table 4-1). On the basis of this data set, the spatial peak SAR value was evaluated with the following procedure (see references or the DASY manual online for more details):

a. combined distance extrapolated was the combined distance from the center of the dipoles 2.7mm away from the tip of the probe housing plus the 1.2 mm distance between the surface and the lowest measuring point. The extrapolation was based on a least-squares algorithm. A polynomial of the fourth order was calculated through the points in the z-axis (normal to the phantom shell). b. After the maximum interpolated values were calculated between the points in the cube, the SAR was averaged over the spatial volume (1g or 10g) using a 3D-Spline interpolation algorithm. The 3D-spline is composed of three one-dimensional splines with the Not a knot condition (in x, y, and z directions). The volume was then integrated with the trapezoidal algorithm. One thousand points (10 x 10 x 10) were obtained through interpolation, in order to calculate the averaged SAR. c. average value was found. The SAR reference value, at the same location as step 2, was re-measured after the zoom scan was complete to calculate the SAR drift. If the drift deviated by more than 5%, the SAR test and drift measurements were repeated. All neighboring volumes were evaluated until no neighboring volume with a higher The data was extrapolated to the surface of the outer-shell of the phantom. The Area and Zoom Scan Resolutions per FCC KDB Publication 865664 D01v01 Table 4-1 2. 3. 4. Maximum Area Scan Maximum Zoom Scan Resolution (mm)

(xarea, yarea) Resolution (mm)

(xzoom, yzoom) Maximum Zoom Scan Spatial Resolution (mm) zzoom(n) Minimum Zoom Scan Volume (mm)

(x,y,z) Frequency 2 GHz 2-3 GHz 3-4 GHz 4-5 GHz 5-6 GHz 15 12 12 10 10 8 5 5 4 4 5 5 4 3 2 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer 30 30 28 25 22 Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 9 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 5 R F E X P O S U R E L I M I T S 5.1 Uncontrolled Environment UNCONTROLLED ENVIRONMENTS are defined as locations where there is the exposure of individuals who have no knowledge or control of their exposure. The general population/uncontrolled exposure limits are applicable to situations in which the general public may be exposed or in which persons who are exposed as a consequence of their employment may not be made fully aware of the potential for exposure or cannot exercise control over their exposure. Members of the general public would come under this category when exposure is not employment-related; for example, in the case of a wireless transmitter that exposes persons in its vicinity. 5.2 Controlled Environment CONTROLLED ENVIRONMENTS are defined as locations where there is exposure that may be incurred by persons who are aware of the potential for exposure, (i.e. as a result of employment or occupation). In general, occupational/controlled exposure limits are applicable to situations in which persons are exposed as a consequence of their employment, who have been made fully aware of the potential for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. This exposure category is also applicable when the exposure is of a transient nature due to incidental passage through a location where the exposure levels may be higher than the general population/uncontrolled limits, but the exposed person is fully aware of the potential for exposure and can exercise control over his or her exposure by leaving the area or by some other appropriate means. SAR Human Exposure Specified in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992 and Health Canada Safety Code 6 Table 5-1 1. The Spatial Peak value of the SAR averaged over any 1 gram of tissue (defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube) and over the appropriate averaging time. 2. The Spatial Average value of the SAR averaged over the whole body. 3. The Spatial Peak value of the SAR averaged over any 10 grams of tissue (defined as a tissue volume in the shape of a cube) and over the appropriate averaging time. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 10 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 6 F C C M E AS U R E M E N T P R O C E D U R E S Power measurements were performed using a base station simulator under digital average power. 6.1 Measured and Reported SAR Per FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01v05, When SAR is not measured at the maximum power level allowed for production units, the results must be scaled to the maximum tune-up tolerance limit according to the power applied to the individual channels tested to determine compliance. For simultaneous transmission, the measured aggregate SAR must be scaled according to the sum of the differences between the maximum tune-up tolerance and actual power used to test each transmitter. When SAR is measured at or scaled to the maximum tune-up tolerance limit, the results are referred to as reported SAR. The highest reported SAR results are identified on the grant of equipment authorization according to procedures in KDB 690783 D01v01r02. 6.2 Procedures Used to Establish RF Signal for SAR The following procedures are according to FCC KDB Publication 941225 D01 SAR Measurement Procedures for 3G Devices v02, October 2007. The device was placed into a simulated call using a base station simulator in a RF shielded chamber. Establishing connections in this manner ensure a consistent means for testing SAR and are recommended for evaluating SAR [4]. Devices under test were evaluated prior to testing, with a fully charged battery and were configured to operate at maximum output power. In order to verify that the device was tested throughout the SAR test at maximum output power, the SAR measurement system measures a point SAR at an arbitrary reference point at the start and end of the 1 gram SAR evaluation, to assess for any power drifts during the evaluation. If the power drift deviated by more than 5%, the SAR test and drift measurements were repeated. 6.3 SAR Measurement Conditions for LTE LTE modes were tested according to FCC KDB 941225 D05v02 publication. Please see notes after the tabulated SAR data for required test configurations. Establishing connections with base station simulators ensure a consistent means for testing SAR and are recommended for evaluating SAR [4]. The R&S CMW500 was used for LTE output power measurements and SAR testing. Closed loop power control was used so the UE transmits with maximum output power during SAR testing. MPR Spectrum Plots for RB Configurations 6.3.1 A properly configured base station simulator was used for SAR tests and power measurements. Therefore, spectrum plots for RB configurations were not required to be included in this report. 6.3.2 MPR is implemented for this device by the manufacturer when the sensor is not active (maximum power scenarios). The specific manufacturer target MPR is indicated alongside the SAR results. MPR is enabled for this device, according to 3GPP TS36.101 Section 6.2.3 6.2.5 under Table 6.2.3-1. See Section 8.4 for MPR targets. 6.3.3 A-MPR (Additional MPR) has been disabled for all SAR tests by setting NS=01 on the base station simulator. A-MPR FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 11 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 6.3.4 According to FCC KDB 941225 D05v02:

Required RB Size and RB Offsets for SAR Testing a. Per Section 5.2.1, SAR is required for QPSK 1 RB Allocation for the largest bandwidth i. The required channel and offset combination with the highest maximum output power is required for SAR. ii. When the reported SAR is 0.8 W/kg, testing of the remaining RB offset configurations and required test channels is not required. Otherwise, SAR is required for the remaining required test channels using the RB offset configuration with highest output power for that channel. iii. When the reported SAR for a required test channel is > 1.45 W/kg, SAR is required for all RB offset configurations for that channel. b. Per Section 5.2.2, SAR is required for 50% RB allocation using the largest bandwidth following the same procedures outlined in Section 5.2.1. c. Per Section 5.2.3, QPSK SAR is not required for the 100% allocation when the highest maximum output power for the 100% allocation is less than the highest maximum output power of the 1 RB and 50% RB allocations and the reported SAR for the 1 RB and 50%

RB allocations is < 0.8 W/kg. d. Per Section 5.2.4 and 5.3, SAR tests for higher order modulations and lower bandwidths configurations are not required when the conducted power of the required test configurations determined by Sections 5.2.1 through 5.2.3 is less than or equal to dB higher than the equivalent configuration using QPSK modulation and when the QPSK SAR for those configurations is <1.45 W/kg. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 12 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 7 T A B L E T S AR T E S T I N G P R O C E D U R E S 7.1 SAR Testing for Tablet per KDB Publication 616217 D04v01 Per FCC KDB 616217, the back surface and edges of the tablet should be tested for SAR compliance with the tablet touching the phantom. The SAR Exclusion Threshold in KDB 447498 D01v05 can be applied to determine SAR test exclusion for adjacent edge configurations. The closest distance from the antenna to an adjacent tablet edge is used to determine if SAR testing is required for the adjacent edges, with the adjacent edge positioned against the phantom and the edge containing the antenna positioned perpendicular to the phantom. Based on the location and output power of the main antenna, back side and top and right edges were required to be evaluated for SAR. Back side and top and left edges were required to be evaluated for the BT/WLAN Antenna. Front side was not required to be evaluated. 7.2 Sensor Reduction Information The technical description contains information about sensor size and locations. Power reduction levels are provided in Section 8. FCC KDB 616217 was used as a guideline for selecting SAR test distances for this device. Since the back-off sensor activation distance for back is 13 mm, a conservative distance of 12 mm was tested for the back side at maximum power. Since the back-off sensor activation distance was 11 mm for the top edge, a conservative distance of 10 mm was tested at maximum power. Sensor triggering distance summary data is included in Appendix G. The sensor is designed to support sufficient detection range and sensitivity to cover regions of the sensors in all applicable directions since the sensor entirely covers the antenna. This tablet was tested in accordance with FCC KDB 616217 D04v01 for sensor power reduction. When the sensor detects a user is touching the device on or near to the antenna the device reduces the maximum allowed output power. However, the sensor is not active when the device is moved beyond the sensor triggering distance and the maximum output power is no longer limited. Therefore, an additional exposure condition is needed in the vicinity of the triggering distance to ensure SAR is compliant when the device is allowed to operate at a non-reduced output power level. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 13 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 8 R F C O N D U C T E D P O W E R S 8.1 LTE Conducted Powers 8.1.1 LTE Band 4 (AWS) i d M Table 8-1 Frequency

[MHz]

1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) Maximum Conducted Powers 20 MHz Bandwidth Channel 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 23.30 23.40 23.14 22.20 22.08 22.04 21.99 22.24 22.52 22.27 21.12 20.83 20.87 20.78 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

MPR [dB]

Note: LTE Band 4 at 20 MHz Bandwidth does not support three non-overlapping channels. Per KDB 941225 D05v02, when a device supports overlapping channel assignment in a channel bandwidth configuration, the middle channel of the group of overlapping channels should be selected for testing. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 14 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 Frequency

[MHz]

1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 w o L i d M h g H i MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

Table 8-2

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) Maximum Conducted Powers 15 MHz Bandwidth Channel 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 23.38 23.23 23.19 22.12 21.97 21.91 21.85 22.37 22.40 22.26 21.03 20.94 20.86 20.91 23.12 23.02 22.91 22.02 21.90 21.93 21.79 22.35 22.24 22.17 21.17 20.92 20.94 20.95 23.19 23.43 23.51 22.10 22.04 22.28 22.04 22.33 22.40 22.67 21.04 21.11 21.22 21.07 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 MPR [dB]

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 15 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

Table 8-3

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) Maximum Conducted Powers 10 MHz Bandwidth Channel 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 23.20 23.13 23.04 22.03 21.95 22.07 21.91 22.51 22.49 22.48 21.11 21.02 20.99 20.93 23.14 23.25 23.20 22.08 21.98 21.96 21.89 21.77 21.81 21.79 21.14 21.07 21.05 20.78 23.03 23.20 23.39 22.05 21.99 22.28 22.03 21.76 21.84 21.99 21.19 21.20 21.35 21.03 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 Frequency

[MHz]

1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 w o L i d M h g H i MPR [dB]

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 16 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 Frequency

[MHz]

1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 w o L i d M h g H i MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

Table 8-4

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) Maximum Conducted Powers 5 MHz Bandwidth Channel 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 23.26 23.13 23.05 22.11 22.07 22.05 22.04 22.06 21.85 22.05 20.86 21.07 20.85 20.88 23.37 23.19 23.12 22.17 22.07 22.23 22.08 22.01 22.04 22.00 21.06 21.19 21.09 21.32 23.13 23.35 23.19 22.11 22.35 22.34 22.23 21.96 22.07 22.01 21.07 21.06 21.07 21.24 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 MPR [dB]

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 17 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

MPR [dB]

Table 8-5 Frequency

[MHz]

1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) Reduced Conducted Powers 20 MHz Bandwidth Channel 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 11.70 12.35 11.63 12.01 12.00 11.69 11.80 11.60 12.06 11.73 11.83 11.93 11.62 11.74 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 i d M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note: LTE Band 4 at 20 MHz Bandwidth does not support three non-overlapping channels. Per KDB 941225 D05v02, when a device supports overlapping channel assignment in a channel bandwidth configuration, the middle channel of the group of overlapping channels should be selected for testing. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 18 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

Table 8-6

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) Reduced Conducted Powers 15 MHz Bandwidth Channel 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20025 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 20325 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 11.71 12.17 11.64 12.10 12.00 11.64 11.92 11.77 11.93 11.87 11.87 11.98 11.68 11.77 11.72 12.06 11.65 12.11 12.03 11.65 11.76 11.69 12.00 11.83 11.87 11.90 11.62 11.83 11.94 12.15 11.64 12.30 12.04 11.76 11.88 11.66 11.96 11.77 11.79 12.09 11.72 11.86 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 Frequency

[MHz]

1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1717.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 1747.5 w o L i d M h g H i MPR [dB]

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 19 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

Table 8-7

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) Reduced Conducted Powers 10 MHz Bandwidth Channel 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 20350 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 12.24 12.47 12.06 12.04 12.08 11.99 11.98 12.00 12.16 11.89 11.97 12.04 12.00 11.96 12.02 12.29 12.03 12.17 12.22 12.06 12.19 11.88 12.10 11.79 12.10 12.17 12.04 12.07 11.89 12.32 11.91 12.00 12.13 12.04 12.08 11.75 12.04 11.87 11.83 11.93 11.87 11.97 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 Frequency

[MHz]

1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1715 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 w o L i d M h g H i MPR [dB]

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 20 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

Table 8-8

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) Reduced Conducted Powers 5 MHz Bandwidth Channel 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 19975 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20175 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 20375 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 12.46 12.54 12.37 11.97 12.18 11.98 12.06 11.93 12.31 11.82 11.99 12.14 11.96 11.97 12.01 12.43 11.98 12.15 12.30 12.11 12.17 11.86 12.15 11.77 12.06 12.20 12.02 12.00 11.80 12.21 11.82 11.96 12.11 12.02 12.01 11.88 12.31 12.00 12.10 12.11 12.02 11.94 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Frequency

[MHz]

1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1712.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1732.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 1752.5 w o L i d M h g H i MPR [dB]

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 21 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 w o L i d M h g H i Frequency

[MHz]

1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 8.1.2 LTE Band 2 (PCS) MPR Allowed per Table 8-9

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset 3GPP [dB]

Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 2 (PCS) Maximum Conducted Powers 20 MHz Bandwidth Channel 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 23.06 23.40 23.25 22.15 22.04 22.04 22.14 22.18 22.35 22.23 21.20 21.42 21.00 21.25 23.60 23.14 23.29 22.30 22.13 22.09 22.21 22.56 22.04 21.85 20.89 20.59 20.49 20.76 23.31 23.00 23.04 21.86 21.63 21.76 21.77 21.64 21.93 21.32 20.29 20.35 20.23 20.57 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 MPR [dB]

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 22 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 Table 8-10 LTE Band 2 (PCS) Maximum Conducted Powers 15 MHz Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth Modulation RB Offset MPR Allowed per RB Size Conducted Power [dBm]

3GPP [dB]

[MHz]

18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 23.44 23.60 23.43 22.41 22.05 22.21 22.29 22.30 22.60 22.58 21.20 21.11 21.30 21.35 22.75 22.45 22.63 21.38 21.69 21.78 21.69 22.21 21.90 22.06 20.70 20.65 20.75 20.75 22.76 22.27 22.03 21.73 20.90 21.00 21.11 21.77 21.82 21.32 20.62 19.98 20.43 20.56 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 Frequency

[MHz]

1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 w o L i d M h g H i MPR [dB]

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 23 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 MPR Allowed per Table 8-11

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset 3GPP [dB]

Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 2 (PCS) Maximum Conducted Powers 10 MHz Bandwidth Channel 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 23.02 23.24 23.34 22.12 22.07 22.15 22.09 21.88 22.13 22.16 21.31 21.30 21.27 21.26 23.24 23.16 23.26 22.11 22.22 22.12 22.15 21.79 21.63 21.84 21.16 21.08 21.17 21.00 22.88 23.11 22.87 21.75 22.03 22.44 22.28 21.96 22.23 22.04 20.87 21.09 21.43 21.19 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 Frequency

[MHz]

1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 w o L i d M h g H i MPR [dB]

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 24 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 Frequency

[MHz]

1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 w o L i d M h g H i MPR Allowed per Table 8-12

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset 3GPP [dB]

Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 2 (PCS) Maximum Conducted Powers 5 MHz Bandwidth Channel 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 23.01 23.30 23.37 22.08 22.07 22.16 22.15 21.96 22.28 22.26 21.08 21.23 21.21 21.12 23.16 23.15 23.20 22.06 22.11 22.20 22.06 21.91 21.89 21.96 21.02 21.08 21.13 21.02 23.11 23.54 22.77 22.35 22.57 22.15 22.44 22.09 22.27 21.72 21.33 21.58 21.40 21.45 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 MPR [dB]

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 25 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 Frequency

[MHz]

1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1860 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 w o L i d M h g H i MPR Allowed per Table 8-13

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset 3GPP [dB]

Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 2 (PCS) Reduced Conducted Powers 20 MHz Bandwidth Channel 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18700 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 19100 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 11.66 12.49 11.59 11.96 11.79 11.51 11.58 11.62 11.96 11.50 11.83 11.76 11.54 11.57 11.61 12.32 11.58 12.19 12.33 12.16 11.96 11.50 12.28 11.61 11.79 12.11 11.92 11.91 11.65 12.14 11.50 11.77 11.78 11.79 11.80 11.57 11.97 11.53 11.77 11.81 11.74 11.75 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 100 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 0 50 99 0 25 50 0 MPR [dB]

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 26 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 LTE Band 2 (PCS) Reduced Conducted Powers 15 MHz Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth Modulation RB Offset RB Size MPR Allowed per Conducted Power [dBm]

3GPP [dB]

[MHz]

Table 8-14 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18675 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 19125 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 1 1 1 36 36 36 75 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 0 36 74 0 18 37 0 11.84 11.78 12.34 11.55 11.74 12.26 11.89 11.84 11.53 11.72 12.09 11.53 12.46 12.30 11.93 11.55 11.60 12.26 12.12 12.08 12.38 12.23 11.54 11.51 12.12 12.13 11.67 11.77 11.73 11.69 11.83 12.00 11.84 12.12 12.43 11.74 12.02 11.53 11.51 11.64 11.52 11.54 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 Frequency

[MHz]

1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1857.5 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 1902.5 w o L i d M h g H i MPR [dB]

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 27 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 MPR Allowed per Table 8-15

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset 3GPP [dB]

Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 2 (PCS) Reduced Conducted Powers 10 MHz Bandwidth Channel 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18650 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 19150 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 11.86 12.50 12.22 12.06 12.15 12.02 12.09 11.86 12.29 11.84 12.03 12.17 12.08 12.17 11.96 12.30 12.02 12.36 12.48 12.43 12.38 11.92 12.42 12.22 12.18 12.40 12.37 12.24 11.81 12.10 11.65 11.69 11.80 11.98 11.87 11.64 11.66 11.65 11.60 11.66 11.90 11.78 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 1 1 1 25 25 25 50 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 0 25 49 0 12 25 0 Frequency

[MHz]

1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 1905 w o L i d M h g H i MPR [dB]

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 28 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 MPR Allowed per 3GPP [dB]

Table 8-16

[MHz]

RB Size RB Offset Modulation Bandwidth Conducted Power [dBm]

LTE Band 2 (PCS) Reduced Conducted Powers 5 MHz Bandwidth Channel 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18625 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 18900 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 19175 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 16-QAM 11.78 12.45 12.10 11.92 12.16 11.95 12.03 11.60 12.23 11.69 11.85 12.04 11.90 11.94 11.88 12.39 12.00 12.16 12.47 12.28 12.31 11.72 12.26 11.92 12.04 12.26 12.12 12.09 11.54 12.09 11.50 11.73 12.14 11.86 11.99 11.65 12.39 11.86 11.65 12.11 11.88 11.94 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0 0 0 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 1 1 1 12 12 12 25 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 0 12 24 0 6 13 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 MPR [dB]

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Frequency

[MHz]

1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1852.5 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1880.0 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 1907.5 w o L i d M h g H i FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 29 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 9 S Y S T E M V E R I F I C A T I O N 9.1 Tissue Verification Table 9-1 Measured Tissue Properties Calibrated for Tests Performed on:

Tissue Type Tissue Temp During Calibration (C) 07/21/2014 1750B 07/21/2014 1900B 22.4 23.2 Measured Frequency Measured Conductivity, Measured Dielectric Constant, TARGET Conductivity, TARGET Dielectric Constant,

% dev

% dev

(MHz) 1710 1750 1790 1850 1880 1910

(S/m) 1.400 1.441 1.481 1.455 1.489 1.521 52.108 51.958 51.839 52.660 52.551 52.442

(S/m) 1.463 1.488 1.514 1.520 1.520 1.520 53.537 53.432 53.326 53.300 53.300 53.300

-4.31%

-3.16%

-2.18%

-4.28%

-2.04%

0.07%

-2.67%

-2.76%

-2.79%

-1.20%

-1.41%

-1.61%

The above measured tissue parameters were used in the DASY software. The DASY software was used to perform interpolation to determine the dielectric parameters at the SAR test device frequencies (per IEEE 1528 6.6.1.2). The tissue parameters listed in the SAR test plots may slightly differ from the table above due to significant digit rounding in the software. 9.2 Test System Verification Prior to SAR assessment, the system is verified to 10% of the SAR measurement on the reference dipole at the time of calibration by the calibration facility. Table 9-2 System Verification Results System Verification TARGET & MEASURED SAR System #

Tissue Frequency

(MHz) Tissue Type Date:

Amb. Temp (C) Liquid Temp (C) H K 1750 1900 BODY 07/21/2014 BODY 07/21/2014 23.4 24.5 22.4 23.2 Input Power

(W) 0.100 0.100 Dipole SN Probe SN Measured SAR1g (W/kg) 1051 5d141 3319 3287 3.680 4.070 1 W Target SAR1g

(W/kg) 37.400 40.600 Note: Full system validation status and results can be found in Appendix E. 1 W Normalized SAR1g (W/kg) Deviation1g

(%) 36.800 40.700

-1.60%

0.25%

System Verification Setup Diagram Figure 9-1 Figure 9-2 System Verification Setup Photo FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 30 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 10 S AR D A T A S U M M A R Y 10.1 Standalone Body SAR Data Table 10-1 PCB Body SAR: LTE Band 4 (AWS) 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 1732.50 20175 Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid FREQUENCY MHz Ch. 1880.00 18900 1880.00 18900 1880.00 18900 1880.00 18900 1880.00 18900 1880.00 18900 Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid Mid FREQUENCY MHz Ch. Mode Bandwidth

[MHz]

Maximum Allowed Power

[dBm]

LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 4 (AWS) 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 23.70 22.70 22.70 23.70 22.70 23.70 22.70 12.60 12.60 12.60 12.60 LTE Band 4 (AWS) ANSI / IEEE C95.1 1992 - SAFETY LIMIT 23.70 20 Spatial Peak Uncontrolled Exposure/General Population MEASUREMENT RESULTS Conducted Power

[dBm]

Power Drift [dB]

MPR

[dB]

Device Serial Number Modulation RB Size RB Offset Spacing Side 23.40 22.20 21.99 23.40 22.20 23.40 22.20 12.35 12.01 12.35 12.01 23.40

-0.01 0.04 0.00

-0.01 0.15 0.08 0.04

-0.01

-0.10

-0.01

-0.10

-0.04 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 4689-0543 4689-0543 4689-0543 4689-0543 4689-0543 4689-0543 4689-0543 4689-0542 4689-0542 4689-0542 4689-0542 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 4689-0543 QPSK 1 50 100 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 0 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 12 mm 12 mm 12 mm 10 mm 10 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm back back back top top right right back back top top 12 mm back Body 1.6 W/kg (mW/g) averaged over 1 gram Duty Cycle 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 SAR (1g)

(W/kg) 0.812 0.651 0.607 0.738 0.582 0.208 0.148 0.606 0.497 0.314 0.271 0.813 Blue entries represent variability Table 10-2 PCB Body SAR: LTE Band 2 (PCS) Scaling Factor Scaled SAR (1g)

(W/kg) Plot #

1.072 1.122 1.178 1.072 1.122 1.072 1.122 1.059 1.146 1.059 1.146 1.072 0.870 0.730 0.715 0.791 0.653 0.223 0.166 0.642 0.570 0.333 0.311 0.872 Mode Bandwidth

[MHz]

Maximum Allowed Power [dBm]

Conducted Power

[dBm]

Power Drift [dB]

MPR

[dB]

Device Serial Number Modulation RB Size RB Offset Spacing Side Duty Cycle MEASUREMENT RESULTS LTE Band 2 (PCS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 23.60 22.60 23.60 22.60 23.60 22.60 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 23.60 22.30 23.60 22.30 23.60 22.30 12.49 12.33 12.49 12.33

-0.01 0.06

-0.20

-0.06 0.14 0.16 0.06 0.17

-0.02

-0.11 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 4689-0538 4689-0538 4689-0538 4689-0538 4689-0538 4689-0538 4689-0542 4689-0542 4689-0542 4689-0542 QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1860.00 18700 Low LTE Band 2 (PCS) 1880.00 18900 Mid LTE Band 2 (PCS) 1860.00 18700 Low LTE Band 2 (PCS) 1880.00 18900 Mid LTE Band 2 (PCS) ANSI / IEEE C95.1 1992 - SAFETY LIMIT Spatial Peak Uncontrolled Exposure/General Population SAR (1g)

(W/kg) 0.703 0.478 0.651 0.425 0.599 0.414 0.432 0.539 0.247 0.280 Scaling Factor Scaled SAR (1g)

(W/kg) 1.000 1.072 1.000 1.072 1.000 1.072 1.002 1.040 1.002 1.040 0.703 0.512 0.651 0.456 0.599 0.444 0.433 0.561 0.247 0.291 2 000 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 25 50 25 12 mm 12 mm 10 mm 10 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0 mm back back top top right right back back top top Body 1.6 W/kg (mW/g) averaged over 1 gram A1 Plot #

A2 2 000 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 31 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 10.2 SAR Test Notes General Notes:

1. The test data reported are the worst-case SAR values according to test procedures specified in FCC KDB Publication 616217 D04. 2. Batteries are fully charged at the beginning of the SAR measurements. 3. Liquid tissue depth was at least 15.0 cm for all frequencies. 4. The manufacturer has confirmed that the device(s) tested have the same physical, mechanical and thermal characteristics and are within operational tolerances expected for production units 5. SAR results were scaled to the maximum allowed power to demonstrate compliance per FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01v05. 6. Per FCC KDB 616217 D04 Section 4.3, SAR tests are required for the back surface and edges of the tablet with the tablet touching the phantom. The SAR Exclusion Threshold in FCC KDB 447498 D01v05 was applied to determine SAR test exclusion for adjacent edge configurations. SAR tests were required for top and right edge for the main antenna. 7. Per FCC KDB 865664 D01 v01, variability SAR tests were performed when the measured SAR results for a frequency band were greater than 0.8 W/kg. Repeated SAR measurements are highlighted in the tables above for clarity. Please see Section 12 for variability analysis. 1. LTE Considerations: LTE test configurations are determined according to SAR Evaluation Considerations for LTE Devices in FCC KDB Publication 941225 D05v02r01. The general test procedures used for testing can be found in Section 6.3.4. 2. MPR is permanently implemented for this device by the manufacturer. The specific manufacturer target MPR is indicated alongside the SAR results. MPR is enabled for this device, according to 3GPP TS36.101 Section 6.2.3 6.2.5 under Table 6.2.3-1. 3. A-MPR was disabled for all SAR tests by setting NS=01 on the base station simulator. SAR tests were performed with the same number of RB and RB offsets transmitting on all TTI frames

(maximum TTI). LTE Notes:

FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 32 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 11 F C C M U L T I - T X A N D A N T E N N A S AR C O N S I D E R A T I O N S 11.1 Introduction The following procedures adopted from FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01v05 are applicable to handsets with built-in unlicensed transmitters such as 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth devices which may simultaneously transmit with the licensed transmitter. 11.2 Simultaneous Transmission Procedures This device contains transmitters that may operate simultaneously. Therefore simultaneous transmission analysis is required. Per FCC KDB 447498 D01v05 IV.C.1.iii, simultaneous transmission SAR test exclusion may be applied when the sum of the 1-g SAR for all the simultaneous transmitting antennas in a specific a physical test configuration is 1.6 W/kg. When standalone SAR is not required to be measured, per FCC KDB 447498 D01v05 4.3.2 2), the following equation must be used to estimate the standalone 1g SAR for simultaneous transmission assessment involving that transmitter when the test separation distance is less than 50mm; otherwise 0.4 W/kg should be used for 1g SAR. Note: Please see RF Exposure Technical Report S/N: 0Y1211281716-R1.A3L with simultaneous SAR assessments for the other combinations not referred to in these tables. This report only contains the combinations applicable to the permissive change. 11.3 Body Simultaneous Transmission Analysis Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with 2.4 GHz WLAN (Body at 0 mm) Table 11-1 Simult Tx Configuration LTE Band 4

(AWS) SAR

(W/kg) 2.4 GHz WLAN SAR (W/kg) SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR Body SAR Back Top Bottom Right Left 0.642 0.333 0.400 0.223 0.400 1.027 0.337 0.400 0.400 0.136 See Note 1 0.670 0.800 0.623 0.536 0.01 N/A N/A N/A N/A Simult Tx Configuration LTE Band 2

(PCS) SAR

(W/kg) 2.4 GHz WLAN SAR (W/kg) SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR Body SAR Back Top Bottom Right Left 0.561 0.291 0.400 0.599 0.400 1.027 0.337 0.400 0.400 0.136 1.588 0.628 0.800 0.999 0.536 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Note 1: No evaluation was performed to determine the aggregate 1g SAR for these configurations as the SPLS ratio between the antenna pairs was below 0.04 per FCC KDB 447498 D01v05. See Section 11.4 for detailed SPLS ratio analysis. Note 2: For configurations excluded per 447498 D01v05, an estimated SAR of 0.4 W/kg was used to determine simultaneous transmission SAR exclusion since the test separation distance was >50 mm. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 33 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with 5 GHz WLAN (Body at 0 mm) Table 11-2 Simult Tx Configuration LTE Band 4

(AWS) SAR

(W/kg) 5 GHz WLAN SAR (W/kg) SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR Body SAR Back Top Bottom Right Left 0.642 0.333 0.400 0.223 0.400 0.565 0.880 0.400 0.400 0.358 1.207 1.213 0.800 0.623 0.758 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Simult Tx Configuration LTE Band 2

(PCS) SAR

(W/kg) 5 GHz WLAN SAR (W/kg) SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR Body SAR Back Top Bottom Right Left 0.561 0.291 0.400 0.599 0.400 0.565 0.880 0.400 0.400 0.358 1.126 1.171 0.800 0.999 0.758 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Note 1: The worst case 5 GHz WIFI reported SAR for each configuration was considered for simultaneous SAR exclusion via summation of standalone SAR, regardless of whether the WIFI channel has WIFI Direct capability, for simplicity to determine compliance. Please note that the actual simultaneous transmission SAR will not exceed the summed levels indicated. Note 2: For configurations excluded per 447498 D01v05, an estimated SAR of 0.4 W/kg was used to determine simultaneous transmission SAR exclusion since the test separation distance was >50 mm. Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with Bluetooth (Body at 0 mm) Table 11-3 Simult Tx Configuration LTE Band 4

(AWS) SAR

(W/kg) Bluetooth SAR

(W/kg) SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR Body SAR Back Top Bottom Right Left 0.642 0.333 0.400 0.223 0.400 0.301 0.094 0.400 0.400 0.037 0.943 0.427 0.800 0.623 0.437 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Simult Tx Configuration LTE Band 2

(PCS) SAR

(W/kg) Bluetooth SAR

(W/kg) SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR Body SAR Back Top Bottom Right Left 0.561 0.291 0.400 0.599 0.400 0.301 0.094 0.400 0.400 0.037 0.862 0.385 0.800 0.999 0.437 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Note 1: For configurations excluded per 447498 D01v05, an estimated SAR of 0.4 W/kg was used to determine simultaneous transmission SAR exclusion since the test separation distance was >50 mm. Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with 2.4 GHz WLAN (Body at 12mm) Table 11-4 Configuration Mode 4G SAR

(W/kg) Back Side Back Side LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 0.872 0.703 2.4 GHz WLAN SAR

(W/kg)

< 1.027

< 1.027 SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR See Note 1 See Note 1

<0.02

<0.02 Note 1: No evaluation was performed to determine the aggregate 1g SAR for these configurations as the SPLS ratio between the antenna pairs was below 0.04 per FCC KDB 447498 D01v05. See Section 11.4 for detailed SPLS ratio analysis. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 34 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with 5 GHz WLAN (Body at 12mm) Table 11-5 Configuration Mode 4G SAR

(W/kg) Back Side Back Side LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 0.872 0.703 5 GHZ WLAN SAR

(W/kg)

< 0.565

< 0.565 SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR

< 1.437

< 1.268 N/A N/A Note 1: The worst case 5 GHz WIFI reported SAR for each configuration was considered for simultaneous SAR exclusion via summation of standalone SAR, regardless of whether the WIFI channel has WIFI Direct capability, for simplicity to determine compliance. Please note that the actual simultaneous transmission SAR will not exceed the summed levels indicated. Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with Bluetooth (Body at 12mm) Table 11-6 Configuration Mode 4G SAR

(W/kg) Bluetooth SAR

(W/kg) SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR Back Side Back Side LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 0.872 0.703

< 0.301

< 0.301

< 1.173

< 1.004 N/A N/A Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with 2.4 GHz WLAN (Body at 10mm) Table 11-7 Configuration Mode 4G SAR

(W/kg) Top Edge Top Edge LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 0.791 0.651 2.4 GHz WLAN SAR

(W/kg)

< 0.337

< 0.337 SAR

(W/kg)

< 1.128

< 0.988 SPLSR N/A N/A Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with 5 GHz WLAN (Body at 10mm) Table 11-8 Configuration Mode 4G SAR

(W/kg) Top Edge Top Edge LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 0.791 0.651 5 GHZ WLAN SAR

(W/kg)

< 0.880

< 0.880 SAR

(W/kg) SPLSR See Note 1

< 1.531

<0.01 N/A Note 1: No evaluation was performed to determine the aggregate 1g SAR for these configurations as the SPLS ratio between the antenna pairs was below 0.04 per FCC KDB 447498 D01v05. See Section 11.4 for detailed SPLS ratio analysis. Note 2: The worst case 5 GHz WIFI reported SAR for each configuration was considered for simultaneous SAR exclusion via summation of standalone SAR, regardless of whether the WIFI channel has WIFI Direct capability, for simplicity to determine compliance. Please note that the actual simultaneous transmission SAR will not exceed the summed levels indicated. Simultaneous Transmission Scenario with Bluetooth (Body at 10mm) Table 11-9 Configuration Mode 4G SAR

(W/kg) Bluetooth SAR

(W/kg) SAR

(W/kg) Top Edge Top Edge LTE Band 4 (AWS) LTE Band 2 (PCS) 0.791 0.651

< 0.094

< 0.094

< 0.885

< 0.745 SPLSR N/A N/A FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 35 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 11.4 SPLSR Evaluation Analysis Per FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01v05, when the sum of the standalone transmitters is more than 1.6 W/kg, the SAR sum to peak locations can be analyzed to determine SAR distribution overlaps. When the SAR peak to location ratio (shown below) for each pair of antennas is 0.04, simultaneous SAR evaluation is not required. The distance between the transmitters was calculated using the following formula. DistanceTx1-Tx2 = Ri = (

x 1 x 2 2

)

+

(

y 1 y 2 2

) SPLS Ratio = (SAR1 + SAR2)1.5/Ri The sum of the standalone SAR values was above 1.6 W/kg for the Body Back side configuration at a separation distance of 0cm with LTE Band 4 potentially operating at limited output power with 2.4 GHz WIFI. Peak SAR Location Plot of LTE Band 4 and 2.4 GHz WLAN Figure 11-4 152.51 mm

(-34.02, -85.99)

(-31.50, 66.50) Peak SAR Locations for Body Back Side LTE Band 4 and 2.4 GHz WLAN Table 11-16 Mode/Band LTE B4 802.11b x (mm)

-31.50

-34.02 Table 11-17 y (mm) 66.50

-85.99 SAR Sum to Peak Location Separation Ratio Calculation Antenna Pair Standalone 1g SAR (W/kg) Ant "a"

LTE B4 Ant "b"

802.11b a 0.642 b 1.027 Standalone SAR Sum

(W/kg) a+b 1.669 Peak SAR Separation Distance

(mm) Da-b 152.51 SPLS Ratio

(a+b)1.5/Da-b 0.01 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 36 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 The sum of the standalone SAR values was above 1.6 W/kg for the Body Back side configuration at a separation distance of 1.2cm with LTE Band 4 potentially operating at maximum output power with 2.4 GHz WIFI. Peak SAR Location Plot of LTE Band 4 and 2.4 GHz WLAN Figure 11-5 149.93 mm

(-34.02, -85.99)

(-22.50, 63.50) Peak SAR Locations for Body Back Side LTE Band 4 and 2.4 GHz WLAN Table 11-18 Mode/Band LTE B4 802.11b x (mm)

-22.50

-34.02 y (mm) 63.50

-85.99 SAR Sum to Peak Location Separation Ratio Calculation Table 11-19 Antenna Pair Standalone 1g SAR (W/kg) Ant "a"

LTE B4 Ant "b"

802.11b a 0.872 b

<1.027 Standalone SAR Sum

(W/kg) a+b

<1.899 Peak SAR Separation Distance

(mm) Da-b 149.93 SPLS Ratio

(a+b)1.5/Da-b

<0.02 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 37 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 The sum of the standalone SAR values was above 1.6 W/kg for the Body Back side configuration at a separation distance of 1.2cm with LTE B2 potentially operating at maximum output power with 2.4 GHz WIFI. Peak SAR Location Plot of LTE B2 and 2.4 GHz WLAN Figure 11-6 147.90 mm

(-34.02, -85.99)

(-23.00, 61.50) Peak SAR Locations for Body Back Side LTE B2 and 2.4 GHz WLAN Table 11-20 Mode/Band LTE B2 802.11b x (mm)

-23.00

-34.02 y (mm) 61.50

-85.99 SAR Sum to Peak Location Separation Ratio Calculation Table 11-21 Antenna Pair Standalone 1g SAR (W/kg) Ant "a"

LTE B2 Ant "b"

802.11b a 0.703 b

<1.027 Standalone SAR Sum

(W/kg) a+b

<1.730 Peak SAR Separation Distance

(mm) Da-b 147.90 SPLS Ratio

(a+b)1.5/Da-b

<0.02 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 38 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 The sum of the standalone SAR values was above 1.6 W/kg for the Body Top Edge configuration at a separation distance of 1.0cm with LTE B4 potentially operating at maximum output power with 5 GHz WIFI. Peak SAR Location Plot of LTE B4 and 5 GHz WLAN Figure 11-7 162.50 mm

(-12.13, -104.97)

(-15.50, 57.50) Peak SAR Locations for Body Top Side LTE B4 and 5 GHz WLAN Table 11-22 Mode/Band LTE B4 802.11a x (mm)

-15.50

-12.13 y (mm) 57.50

-104.97 SAR Sum to Peak Location Separation Ratio Calculation Table 11-23 Antenna Pair Standalone 1g SAR (W/kg) Ant "a"

LTE B4 Ant "b"

802.11a a 0.791 b

<0.880 11.5 Simultaneous Transmission Conclusion Standalone SAR Sum

(W/kg) a+b

<1.671 Peak SAR Separation Distance

(mm) Da-b 162.50 SPLS Ratio

(a+b)1.5/Da-b

<0.01 The above numerical summed SAR results and SPLSR analysis is sufficient to determine that simultaneous transmission cases will not exceed the SAR limit and therefore no measured volumetric simultaneous SAR summation is required per FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01v05. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 39 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 12 S AR M E AS U R E M E N T V AR I A B I L I T Y 12.1 Measurement Variability Per FCC KDB Publication 865664 D01v01, SAR measurement variability was assessed for each frequency band, which was determined by the SAR probe calibration point and tissue-equivalent medium used for the device measurements. When both head and body tissue-equivalent media were required for SAR measurements in a frequency band, the variability measurement procedures were applied to the tissue medium with the highest measured SAR, using the highest measured SAR configuration for that tissue-equivalent medium. These additional measurements were repeated after the completion of all measurements requiring the same head or body tissue-equivalent medium in a frequency band. The test device was returned to ambient conditions (normal room temperature) with the battery fully charged before it was re-mounted on the device holder for the repeated measurement(s) to minimize any unexpected variations in the repeated results. SAR Measurement Variability was assessed using the following procedures for each frequency band:

1) When the original highest measured SAR is 0.80 W/kg, the measurement was repeated once. 2) A second repeated measurement was performed only if the ratio of largest to smallest SAR for the original and first repeated measurements was > 1.20 or when the original or repeated measurement was 1.45 W/kg (~ 10% from the 1-g SAR limit). 3) A third repeated measurement was performed only if the original, first or second repeated measurement was 1.5 W/kg and the ratio of largest to smallest SAR for the original, first and second repeated measurements is > 1.20. 4) Repeated measurements are not required when the original highest measured SAR is < 0.80 W/kg Table 12-1 Body SAR Measurement Variability Results BODY VARIABILITY RESULTS Band FREQUENCY MHz Ch. Mode Service Side Spacing 1750 1732.50 20175 LTE Band 4 (AWS) QPSK, 1 RB, 50 RB Offset back 12 mm Measured SAR (1g)

(W/kg) 0.812 1st Repeated SAR (1g)

(W/kg) Ratio 2nd Repeated SAR (1g)

(W/kg) Ratio 3rd Repeated SAR (1g)

(W/kg) Ratio 0.813 1.00 N/A N/A N/A N/A ANSI / IEEE C95.1 1992 - SAFETY LIMIT Spatial Peak Uncontrolled Exposure/General Population Body 1.6 W/kg (mW/g) averaged over 1 gram 12.2 Measurement Uncertainty The measured SAR was <1.5 W/kg for all frequency bands. Therefore, per KDB Publication 865664 D01v01, the extensive SAR measurement uncertainty analysis described in IEEE 1528-2003 was not required FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 40 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 13 E Q U I P M E N T L I S T Manufacturer Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Amplifier Research Anritsu Anritsu Anritsu Anritsu Anritsu Anritsu Anritsu COMTECH Control Company Control Company Fisher Scientific Fisher Scientific Gigatronics Gigatronics MCL MiniCircuits Mini-Circuits Mini-Circuits Mini-Circuits Mini-Circuits Mitutoyo Narda Narda Pasternack Pasternack Rohde & Schwarz Rohde & Schwarz Rohde & Schwarz Rohde & Schwarz Rohde & Schwarz Rohde & Schwarz Seekonk Seekonk SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG SPEAG Tektronix Model E5515C E8257D 8648D E4438C 8753ES 8594A 15S1G6 ML2495A MA2411B MA2411B ML2469A MA24106A MA24106A MT8820C AR85729-5/5759B 61220-416 36934-158 S97611 15-077-960 80701A 8651A BW-N6W5+

SLP-2400+

BW-N20W5+

NLP-1200+

NLP-2950+

BW-N20W5 CD-6"CSX 4014C-6 BW-S3W2 PE2208-6 PE2209-10 NRVD NRV-Z32 CMW500 SME06 NRVS CMU200 NC-100 NC-100 DAKS-3.5 DAE4 ES3DV3 D1900V2 D1750V2 DAE4 ES3DV3 DAK-3.5 RSA6114A Description Wireless Communications Test Set

(250kHz-20GHz) Signal Generator

(9kHz-4GHz) Signal Generator ESG Vector Signal Generator S-Parameter Network Analyzer

(9kHz-2.9GHz) Spectrum Analyzer Amplifier Power Meter Pulse Power Sensor Pulse Power Sensor Power Meter USB Power Sensor USB Power Sensor Radio Communication Analyzer Solid State Amplifier Long-Stem Thermometer Wall-Mounted Thermometer Thermometer Digital Thermometer

(0.05-18GHz) Power Sensor Universal Power Meter 6dB Attenuator Low Pass Filter DC to 18 GHz Precision Fixed 20 dB Attenuator Low Pass Filter DC to 1000 MHz Low Pass Filter DC to 2700 MHz Power Attenuator Digital Caliper 4 - 8 GHz SMA 6 dB Directional Coupler Attenuator (3dB) Bidirectional Coupler Bidirectional Coupler Dual Channel Power Meter Peak Power Sensor Radio Communication Tester Signal Generator Single Channel Power Meter Base Station Simulator Torque Wrench Torque Wrench 5/16", 8" lbs Portable Dielectric Assessment Kit Dasy Data Acquisition Electronics SAR Probe 1900 MHz SAR Dipole 1750 MHz SAR Dipole Dasy Data Acquisition Electronics SAR Probe Dielectric Assessment Kit Real Time Spectrum Analyzer Cal Date 9/24/2012 4/15/2014 4/15/2014 4/25/2014 5/22/2014 N/A CBT 10/31/2013 11/14/2013 2/3/2014 3/14/2014 5/15/2014 5/15/2014 CBT CBT 4/29/2014 4/29/2014 4/12/2013 12/4/2013 10/30/2013 10/30/2013 CBT CBT CBT CBT CBT CBT Cal Interval Biennial Annual Annual Annual Annual N/A NA Annual Annual Annual Annual Annual Annual NA NA Biennial Biennial Biennial Biennial Annual Annual NA NA NA NA NA NA Cal Due 9/24/2014 4/15/2015 4/15/2015 4/25/2015 5/22/2015 N/A CBT 10/31/2014 11/14/2014 2/3/2015 3/14/2015 5/15/2015 5/15/2015 CBT CBT 4/29/2016 4/29/2016 4/12/2015 12/4/2015 10/30/2014 10/30/2014 CBT CBT CBT CBT CBT CBT Serial Number GB43163447 MY45470194 3629U00687 MY42082385 US39170118 3051A00187 433978 1039008 1126066 1339018 1306009 1244524 1244512 6201144418 M3W1A00-1002 111331323 122014488 130219304 130764558 1833460 8650319 1139 R8979500903 N/A N/A N/A 1226 5/8/2014 Biennial 5/8/2016 13264165 CBT CBT CBT CBT 10/12/2012 10/12/2012 10/4/2013 10/30/2013 10/31/2013 6/6/2014 3/18/2014 3/18/2014 8/18/2013 11/19/2013 11/20/2013 4/9/2014 4/10/2014 4/11/2014 4/17/2014 5/6/2014 4/16/2014 NA NA NA NA Biennial Biennial Biennial Annual Annual Annual Biennial Biennial Annual Annual Annual Annual Annual Annual Annual Annual Annual CBT CBT CBT CBT 10/12/2014 10/12/2014 10/4/2015 10/30/2014 10/31/2014 6/6/2015 3/18/2016 3/18/2016 8/18/2014 11/19/2014 11/20/2014 4/9/2015 4/10/2015 4/11/2015 4/17/2015 5/6/2015 4/16/2015 N/A 120 N/A N/A 101695 836019/013 103962 832026 835360/0079 109892 22313 N/A 1009 1408 3287 5d141 1051 1368 3319 1070 B010177 Note: CBT (Calibrated Before Testing). Prior to testing, the measurement paths containing a cable, amplifier, attenuator, coupler or filter were connected to a calibrated source (i.e. a signal generator) to determine the losses of the measurement path. The power meter offset was then adjusted to compensate for the measurement system losses. This level offset is stored within the power meter before measurements are made. This calibration verification procedure applies to the system verification and output power measurements. The calibrated reading is then taken directly from the power meter after compensation of the losses for all final power measurements. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 41 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 14 M E AS U R E M E N T U N C E R T AI N T I E S a b c d e=

Uncertainty Component Measurement System Probe Calibration Axial Isotropy Hemishperical Isotropy Boundary Effect Linearity System Detection Limits Readout Electronics Response Time Integration Time RF Ambient Conditions Probe Positioner Mechanical Tolerance Probe Positioning w/ respect to Phantom Extrapolation, Interpolation & Integration algorithms for Max. SAR Evaluation Test Sample Related Test Sample Positioning Device Holder Uncertainty Output Power Variation - SAR drift measurement Phantom & Tissue Parameters Phantom Uncertainty (Shape & Thickness tolerances) Liquid Conductivity - deviation from target values Liquid Conductivity - measurement uncertainty Liquid Permittivity - deviation from target values Liquid Permittivity - measurement uncertainty Combined Standard Uncertainty (k=1) Expanded Uncertainty

(95% CONFIDENCE LEVEL) IEEE 1528 Sec. E.2.1 E.2.2 E.2.2 E.2.3 E.2.4 E.2.5 E.2.6 E.2.7 E.2.8 E.6.1 E.6.2 E.6.3 E.5 E.4.2 E.4.1 6.6.2 E.3.1 E.3.2 E.3.3 E.3.2 E.3.3 f(d,k) Tol. Prob. f ci g ci

( %) Dist. Div. 1gm 10 gms 1.0 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.64 0.64 0.60 0.60 1.0 0.43 0.43 0.49 0.49 6.0 0.25 1.3 0.4 0.3 5.1 1.0 0.8 2.6 3.0 0.4 2.9 1.0 6.0 3.32 5.0 4.0 5.0 3.8 5.0 4.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.73 1.73 1.73 1.73 1.73 1.73 1 1.73 1.73 1.73 1.73 1 1.73 1 N N N N N N N R R R R R R N R R R R N R N RSS k=2 h =

i =

k c x f/e c x g/e 1gm ui

( %) 10gms ui

( %) 6.0 0.2 1.3 0.4 0.3 5.1 1.0 0.5 1.5 1.7 0.2 1.7 0.6 6.0 1.9 2.9 2.3 1.8 2.4 1.7 2.7 12.1 24.2 6.0 0.2 1.3 0.4 0.3 5.1 1.0 0.5 1.5 1.7 0.2 1.7 0.6 6.0 1.9 2.9 2.3 1.2 1.6 1.4 2.2 11.7 23.5 vi 287 6 6 299 The above measurement uncertainties are according to IEEE Std. 1528-2003 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 42 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 15 C O N C L U S I O N 15.1 Measurement Conclusion The SAR evaluation indicates that the EUT complies with the RF radiation exposure limits of the FCC and Industry Canada, with respect to all parameters subject to this test. These measurements were taken to simulate the RF effects of RF exposure under worst-case conditions. Precise laboratory measures were taken to assure repeatability of the tests. The results and statements relate only to the item(s) tested. Please note that the absorption and distribution of electromagnetic energy in the body are very complex phenomena that depend on the mass, shape, and size of the body, the orientation of the body with respect to the field vectors, and the electrical properties of both the body and the environment. Other variables that may play a substantial role in possible biological effects are those that characterize the environment (e.g. ambient temperature, air velocity, relative humidity, and body insulation) and those that characterize the individual (e.g. age, gender, activity level, debilitation, or disease). Because various factors may interact with one another to vary the specific biological outcome of an exposure to electromagnetic fields, any protection guide should consider maximal amplification of biological effects as a result of field-body interactions, environmental conditions, and physiological variables. [3]

FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 43 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 16 R E F E R E N C E S

[1] Federal Communications Commission, ET Docket 93-62, Guidelines for Evaluating the Environmental Effects of Radiofrequency Radiation, Aug. 1996.

[2] ANSI/IEEE C95.1-2005, American National Standard safety levels with respect to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields, 3kHz to 300GHz, New York: IEEE, 2006.

[3] ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992, American National Standard safety levels with respect to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields, 3kHz to 300GHz, New York: IEEE, Sept. 1992.

[4] ANSI/IEEE C95.3-2002, IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave, New York: IEEE, December 2002.

[5] Federal Communications Commission, OET Bulletin 65 (Edition 97-01), Supplement C (Edition 01-01), Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields, June 2001.

[6]

IEEE Standards Coordinating Committee 34 IEEE Std. 1528-2003, Recommended Practice for Determining the Peak Spatial-Average Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) in the Human Body Due to Wireless Communications Devices.

[7] NCRP, National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements, Biological Effects and Exposure Criteria for RadioFrequency Electromagnetic Fields, NCRP Report No. 86, 1986. Reprinted Feb. 1995.

[8] T. Schmid, O. Egger, N. Kuster, Automated E-field scanning system for dosimetric assessments, IEEE Transaction on Microwave Theory and Techniques, vol. 44, Jan. 1996, pp. 105-113.

[9] K. Pokovic, T. Schmid, N. Kuster, Robust setup for precise calibration of E-field probes in tissue simulating liquids at mobile communications frequencies, ICECOM97, Oct. 1997, pp. -124.

[10] K. Pokovic, T. Schmid, and N. Kuster, E-field Probe with improved isotropy in brain simulating liquids, Proceedings of the ELMAR, Zadar, Croatia, June 23-25, 1996, pp. 172-175.

[11] Schmid & Partner Engineering AG, Application Note: Data Storage and Evaluation, June 1998, p2.

[12] V. Hombach, K. Meier, M. Burkhardt, E. Kuhn, N. Kuster, The Dependence of EM Energy Absorption upon Human Modeling at 900 MHz, IEEE Transaction on Microwave Theory and Techniques, vol. 44 no. 10, Oct. 1996, pp. 1865-1873.

[13] N. Kuster and Q. Balzano, Energy absorption mechanism by biological bodies in the near field of dipole antennas above 300MHz, IEEE Transaction on Vehicular Technology, vol. 41, no. 1, Feb. 1992, pp. 17-23.

[14] G. Hartsgrove, A. Kraszewski, A. Surowiec, Simulated Biological Materials for Electromagnetic Radiation Absorption Studies, University of Ottawa, Bioelectromagnetics, Canada: 1987, pp. 29-36.

[15] Q. Balzano, O. Garay, T. Manning Jr., Electromagnetic Energy Exposure of Simulated Users of Portable Cellular Telephones, IEEE Transactions on Vehicular Technology, vol. 44, no.3, Aug. 1995.

[16] W. Gander, Computermathematick, Birkhaeuser, Basel, 1992.

[17] W.H. Press, S.A. Teukolsky, W.T. Vetterling, and B.P. Flannery, Numerical Recipes in C, The Art of Scientific Computing, Second edition, Cambridge University Press, 1992. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 44 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012

[18] Federal Communications Commission, OET Bulletin 65, Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields. Supplement C, Dec. 1997.

[19] N. Kuster, R. Kastle, T. Schmid, Dosimetric evaluation of mobile communications equipment with known precision, IEEE Transaction on Communications, vol. E80-B, no. 5, May 1997, pp. 645-652.

[20] CENELEC CLC/SC111B, European Prestandard (prENV 50166-2), Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High-frequency: 10kHz-300GHz, Jan. 1995.

[21] Prof. Dr. Niels Kuster, ETH, Eidgenssische Technische Hoschschule Zrich, Dosimetric Evaluation of the Cellular Phone.

[22] IEC 62209-1, Human exposure to radio frequency fields from hand-held and body-mounted wireless communication devices - Human models, instrumentation, and procedures - Part 1: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for hand-held devices used in close proximity to the ear (frequency range of 300 MHz to 3 GHz), Feb. 2005.

[23] Industry Canada RSS-102 Radio Frequency Exposure Compliance of Radiocommunication Apparatus (All Frequency Bands) Issue 4, March 2010.

[24] Health Canada Safety Code 6 Limits of Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz 300 GHz, 2009

[25] FCC Public Notice DA-02-1438. Office of Engineering and Technology Announces a Transition Period for the Phantom Requirements of Supplement C to OET Bulletin 65, June 19, 2002

[26] FCC SAR Test Procedures for 2G-3G Devices, Mobile Hotspot and UMPC Devices KDB Publications 941225, D01-D07

[27] SAR Measurement procedures for IEEE 802.11a/b/g KDB Publication 248227 D01v01r02

[28] FCC SAR Considerations for Handsets with Multiple Transmitters and Antennas, KDB Publications 648474 D02-D04

[29] FCC SAR Evaluation Considerations for Laptop, Notebook, Netbook and Tablet Computers, FCC KDB Publication 616217 D04

[30] FCC SAR Measurement and Reporting Requirements for 100MHz 6 GHz, KDB Publications 865664 D01-D02

[31] FCC General RF Exposure Guidance and SAR Procedures for Dongles, KDB Publication 447498, D01-D02

[32] Anexo Resoluo No. 533, de 10 de Septembro de 2009.

[33] IEC 62209-2, Human exposure to radio frequency fields from hand-held and body-mounted wireless communication devices - Human models, instrumentation, and procedures - Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body

(frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz), Mar. 2010. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Document S/N:

0Y1407221432.A3L 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. Test Dates:

07/21/2014 DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page 45 of 45 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 A P P E N D I X A : S A R T E S T D A T A 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. PCTEST ENGINEERING LABORATORY, INC. DUT: A3LSCHI925U; Type: Portable Tablet Computer; Serial: 4689-0543 Communication System: UID 0, LTE Band 4 (AWS); Frequency: 1732.5 MHz;Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium: 1750 Body Medium parameters used (interpolated):

= 52.024; = 1000 kg/m3 f = 1732.5 MHz; = 1.423 S/m;

r Phantom section: Flat Section ; Space: 1.2 cm Test Date: 07-21-2014; Ambient Temp: 23.4C; Tissue Temp: 22.4C Probe: ES3DV3 - SN3319; ConvF(4.85, 4.85, 4.85); Calibrated: 4/17/2014;

Sensor-Surface: 3mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1368; Calibrated: 4/11/2014 Phantom: ELI left; Type: QDOVA002AA; Serial: TP:1202 Measurement SW: DASY52, Version 52.8 (8);SEMCAD X Version 14.6.10 (7331) Mode: LTE Band 4 (AWS), Body SAR, Back side, Mid.ch, 20 MHz Bandwidth, QPSK, 1 RB, 50 RB Offset Area Scan (9x23x1): Measurement grid: dx=15mm, dy=15mm Zoom Scan (5x5x7)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=8mm, dy=8mm, dz=5mm Reference Value = 25.61 V/m; Power Drift = -0.04 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 1.34 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 0.813 W/kg 0 dB = 0.981 W/kg = -0.08 dBW/kg A1 PCTEST ENGINEERING LABORATORY, INC. DUT: A3LSCHI925U; Type: Portable Tablet Computer; Serial: 4689-0538 Communication System: UID 0, LTE Band 2 (PCS); Frequency: 1880 MHz;Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium: 1900 Body Medium parameters used:

f = 1880 MHz; = 1.489 S/m;

= 52.551; = 1000 kg/m3 r Phantom section: Flat Section ; Space: 1.2 cm Test Date: 07-21-2014; Ambient Temp: 24.5C; Tissue Temp: 23.2C Probe: ES3DV3 - SN3287; ConvF(4.67, 4.67, 4.67); Calibrated: 11/20/2013;

Sensor-Surface: 3mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1408; Calibrated: 11/19/2013 Phantom: ELI v5.0; Type: QDOVA001BB; Serial: 1229 Measurement SW: DASY52, Version 52.8 (8);SEMCAD X Version 14.6.10 (7331) Mode: LTE Band 2 (PCS), Body SAR, Back side, Mid.ch, 20 MHz Bandwidth, QPSK, 1 RB, 0 RB Offset Area Scan (16x23x1): Measurement grid: dx=15mm, dy=15mm Zoom Scan (5x5x7)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=8mm, dy=8mm, dz=5mm Reference Value = 22.70 V/m; Power Drift = -0.01 dB Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 1.21 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 0.703 W/kg 0 dB = 0.860 W/kg = -0.66 dBW/kg A2 A P P E N D I X B : S Y S T E M V E R I F I C A T I O N 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. PCTEST ENGINEERING LABORATORY, INC. DUT: SAR Dipole 1750 MHz; Type: D1750V2; Serial: 1051 Communication System: UID 0, CW; Frequency: 1750 MHz;Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium: 1750 Body Medium parameters used:

f = 1750 MHz; = 1.441 S/m;

= 51.958; = 1000 kg/m3 r Phantom section: Flat Section ; Space: 1.0 cm Test Date: 07-21-2014; Ambient Temp: 23.4C; Tissue Temp: 22.4C Probe: ES3DV3 - SN3319; ConvF(4.85, 4.85, 4.85); Calibrated: 4/17/2014;

Sensor-Surface: 3mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1368; Calibrated: 4/11/2014 Phantom: ELI left; Type: QDOVA002AA; Serial: TP:1202 Measurement SW: DASY52, Version 52.8 (8);SEMCAD X Version 14.6.10 (7331) 1750 MHz System Verification Area Scan (7x9x1): Measurement grid: dx=15mm, dy=15mm Zoom Scan (5x5x7)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=8mm, dy=8mm, dz=5mm Input Power: 20 dBm (100 mW) Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 6.35 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 3.68 W/kg Deviation: -1.60%

0 dB = 4.53 W/kg = 6.56 dBW/kg B1 PCTEST ENGINEERING LABORATORY, INC. DUT: SAR Dipole 1900 MHz; Type: D1900V2; Serial: 5d141 Communication System: UID 0, CW; Frequency: 1900 MHz;Duty Cycle: 1:1 Medium: 1900 Body Medium parameters used (interpolated):

= 52.478; = 1000 kg/m3 f = 1900 MHz; = 1.510 S/m;

r Phantom section: Flat Section ; Space: 1.0 cm Test Date: 07-21-2014; Ambient Temp: 24.5C; Tissue Temp: 23.2C Probe: ES3DV3 - SN3287; ConvF(4.67, 4.67, 4.67); Calibrated: 11/20/2013;

Sensor-Surface: 3mm (Mechanical Surface Detection) Electronics: DAE4 Sn1408; Calibrated: 11/19/2013 Phantom: ELI v5.0; Type: QDOVA001BB; Serial: 1229 Measurement SW: DASY52, Version 52.8 (8);SEMCAD X Version 14.6.10 (7331) 1900 MHz System Verification Area Scan (7x10x1): Measurement grid: dx=15mm, dy=15mm Zoom Scan (5x5x7)/Cube 0: Measurement grid: dx=8mm, dy=8mm, dz=5mm Input Power: 20 dBm (100 mW) Peak SAR (extrapolated) = 7.19 W/kg SAR(1 g) = 4.07 W/kg Deviation 0.25%

0 dB = 5.11 W/kg = 7.08 dBW/kg B2 A P P E N D I X C : P R O B E C A L I B R A T I O N 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. A P P E N D I X D : S AR T I S S U E S P E C I F I C AT I O N S Measurement Procedure for Tissue verification:

1) The network analyzer and probe system was configured and calibrated. 2) The probe was immersed in the tissue. The tissue was placed in a nonmetallic container. Trapped air bubbles beneath the flange were minimized by placing the probe at a slight angle. 3) The complex admittance with respect to the probe aperture was measured 4) The complex relative permittivity can be calculated from the below equation

(Pournaropoulos and Misra):

b b Y

=

j 2 r 0

[

]

(

) 2 ab ln a a 0

[

exp cos rj 0

'

r 0

(

r

]

2/1

) ddd where Y is the admittance of the probe in contact with the sample, the primed and unprimed coordinates

, is the angular frequency, refer to source and observation points, respectively, and

+

22 1=j cos 2r

.

=

2 Table D-I Composition of the Tissue Equivalent Matter Frequency (MHz) Tissue Ingredients (% by weight) DGBE NaCl Water 1750 Body 31 0.2 68.8 1900 Body 29.44 0.39 70.17 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Test Dates:

07/21/2014 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager APPENDIX D:

Page 1 of 1 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 A P P E N D I X E : S AR S Y S T E M V A L I D A T I O N Per FCC KDB 865664 D02v01, SAR system validation status should be documented to confirm measurement accuracy. The SAR systems (including SAR probes, system components and software versions) used for this device were validated against its performance specifications prior to the SAR measurements. Reference dipoles were used with the required tissue- equivalent media for system validation, according to the procedures outlined in IEEE 1528-2003 and FCC KDB 865664 D01 v01. Since SAR probe calibrations are frequency dependent, each probe calibration point was validated at a frequency within the valid frequency range of the probe calibration point, using the system that normally operates with the probe for routine SAR measurements and according to the required tissue-equivalent media. A tabulated summary of the system validation status including the validation date(s), measurement frequencies, SAR probes and tissue dielectric parameters has been included. Table E-I SAR System Validation Summary SAR SYSTEM

#

FREQ.

[MHz]

DATE PROBE SN PROBE TYPE PROBE CAL. POINT

()

(r) SENSI-

TIVITY PROBE LINEARITY PROBE ISOTROPY MOD. TYPE COND. PERM. CW VALIDATION MOD. VALIDATION H K 1750 1900 6/27/2014 6/25/2014 3319 3287 ES3DV3 ES3DV3 1750 1900 Body Body 1.449 1.523 PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS N/A GMSK DUTY FACTOR N/A PASS PAR N/A N/A NOTE: While the probes have been calibrated for both a CW and modulated signals, all measurements were performed using communication systems calibrated for CW signals only. Modulations in the table above represent test configurations for which the measurement system has been validated per FCC KDB Publication 865664 D01v01 for scenarios when CW probe calibrations are used with other signal types. SAR systems were validated for modulated signals with a periodic duty cycle, such as GMSK, according to KDB 865664. 51.91 51.28 FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Test Dates:

07/21/2014 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. DUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager APPENDIX D:

Page 1 of 1 REV 11.3 M 04/23/2012 A P P E N D I X G : S E N S O R T R I G G E R I N G D A T A S U M M A R Y FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Test Dates:

07/21/2014 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. EUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page G1 of G4 REV 11.1M 02/20/20 A3LSCHI925U Sensor Triggering Data Summary Per FCC KDB Publication 616217 D01, this device was tested by the manufacturer to determine the proximity sensor triggering distances for the back and top edge of the device. The measured output power within 5 mm of the triggering points (or until touching the phantom) is included for back side and each applicable edge. To ensure all production units are compliant it is necessary to test SAR at a distance 1mm less than the smallest distance from the device and SAR phantom (determined from these triggering tests according to the KDB 616217 D01) with the device at maximum output power without power reduction. These additional SAR Tests are included additionally to the SAR tests for the device touching the SAR phantom, with reduced power. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Test Dates:

07/21/2014 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. EUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page G2 of G4 REV 11.1M 02/20/20 Back Side Moving Towards the Phantom KDB 616217 6.2.9 Measured Power [dBm]

Distance[mm]

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Cell CDMA PCS CDMA 24.69 24.71 24.90 24.71 24.70 19.01 18.99 18.96 19.04 19.03 19.00 24.73 24.69 24.71 24.70 24.72 14.04 13.97 14.01 14.01 14.03 14.03 AWS CDMA 24.71 24.71 24.73 24.71 24.70 14.52 14.51 14.49 14.48 14.48 14.50 LTE B2 LTE B4 LTE B5 23.11 23.10 23.10 23.13 23.12 12.11 12.01 12.14 12.08 12.08 12.02 23.20 23.20 23.21 23.22 23.22 12.21 21.13 21.11 12.09 12.12 12.12 23.21 23.20 23.20 23.22 23.20 15.00 15.00 15.01 15.01 15.02 15.00 LTE B12 23.00 23.03 23.00 23.01 23.01 14.70 14.72 14.74 14.73 14.73 14.74 Moving Away from the Phantom KDB 616217 6.2.9 Measured Power [dBm]

Distance[mm]

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Cell CDMA PCS CDMA 24.69 24.71 24.90 24.71 24.70 19.01 18.99 18.96 19.04 19.03 19.00 24.73 24.69 24.71 24.70 24.72 14.04 13.97 14.01 14.01 14.03 14.03 AWS CDMA 24.71 24.71 24.73 24.71 24.70 14.52 14.51 14.49 14.48 14.48 14.50 LTE B2 LTE B4 LTE B5 23.11 23.10 23.10 23.13 23.12 12.11 12.01 12.00 12.03 12.04 12.02 23.20 23.20 23.21 23.22 23.22 12.11 12.13 12.11 12.09 12.12 12.12 2.21 23.20 23.20 23.22 23.20 15.00 15.00 15.01 15.01 15.02 15.00 LTE B12 23.00 23.03 23.00 23.01 23.01 14.70 14.72 14.74 14.73 14.73 14.74 Based on the most conservative measured triggering distance of 13 mm, additional SAR measurements were required at 12 mm from the back side. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Test Dates:

07/21/2014 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. EUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page G3 of G4 REV 11.1M 02/20/20 Top Edge Moving Towards the Phantom KDB 616217 6.2.9 Measured Power [dBm]

Distance[mm]

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Cell CDMA PCS CDMA 24.69 24.71 24.90 24.71 24.70 19.01 18.99 18.96 19.04 19.03 19.00 24.73 24.69 24.71 24.70 24.72 14.04 13.97 14.01 14.01 14.03 14.03 AWS CDMA 24.71 24.71 24.73 24.71 24.70 14.52 14.51 14.49 14.48 14.48 14.50 LTE B2 LTE B4 LTE B5 23.11 23.10 23.10 23.13 23.12 12.01 12.01 12.03 12.09 12.08 12.02 23.20 23.20 23.21 23.22 23.22 12.11 12.13 12.11 12.11 12.13 12.10 2.21 23.20 23.20 23.22 23.20 15.00 15.00 15.01 15.01 15.02 15.00 LTE B12 23.00 23.03 23.00 23.01 23.01 14.70 14.72 14.74 14.73 14.73 14.74 Moving Away from the Phantom KDB 616217 6.2.9 Measured Power [dBm]

Distance[mm]

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Cell CDMA PCS CDMA 24.69 24.71 24.90 24.71 24.70 19.01 18.99 18.96 19.04 19.03 19.00 24.73 24.69 24.71 24.70 24.72 14.04 13.97 14.01 14.01 14.03 14.03 AWS CDMA 24.71 24.71 24.73 24.71 24.70 14.52 14.51 14.49 14.48 14.48 14.50 LTE B2 LTE B4 LTE B5 23.11 23.10 23.10 23.13 23.12 12.01 12.01 12.03 12.09 12.08 12.02 23.20 23.20 23.21 23.22 23.22 12.11 12.13 12.11 12.11 12.13 12.10 2.21 23.20 23.20 23.22 23.20 15.00 15.00 15.01 15.01 15.02 15.00 LTE B12 23.00 23.03 23.00 23.01 23.01 14.70 14.72 14.74 14.73 14.73 14.74 Based on the most conservative measured triggering distance of 11 mm, additional SAR measurements were required at 10 mm from the top edge. FCC ID: A3LSCHI925U SAR EVALUATION REPORT Test Dates:

07/21/2014 2014 PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc. EUT Type:

Portable Tablet Computer Reviewed by:

Quality Manager Page G4 of G4 REV 11.1M 02/20/20